Sunteți pe pagina 1din 229

iManager U2000 LCT

V200R016C50

U2000 LCT User Guide

Issue 04
Date 2016-12-25

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2016. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide About This Document

About This Document

Related Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Version

iManager U2000 LCT V200R016C50

Intended Audience
The iManager U2000 LCT User Guide describes how to install and start the U2000 LCT, and
also describes the features and functions of the U2000 LCT.

This document guides the user to understand basic operations of the U2000 LCT.

The intended audiences of this document are:

l Network Planning Engineer


l Installation and Commissioning Engineer
l Network Monitoring Engineer
l Data Configuration Engineer
l NM Administrator
l System Maintenance Engineer

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not


avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not


avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not


avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.

Calls attention to important information, best practices and


tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and environment
deterioration.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide About This Document

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Based on Product Version V200R016C50


The forth release. Some bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 03 (2016-11-01) Based on Product Version V200R016C50


The third release. Some bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2016-10-18) Based on Product Version V200R016C50


The second release. Some bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2016-09-30) Based on Product Version V200R016C50


The first release.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 Installation Guide......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Preparing to Install..........................................................................................................................................................2
1.1.1 Hardware and Software Requirements........................................................................................................................ 2
1.1.2 Obtaining Software......................................................................................................................................................2
1.1.3 Verifying Downloaded Software Packages by Using PGPVerify............................................................................... 4
1.2 Installing the U2000 LCT...............................................................................................................................................6
1.2.1 Performing Pre-installation Checks.............................................................................................................................6
1.2.2 Installing the U2000 LCT and Database..................................................................................................................... 7
1.2.3 Checking the Installation Result of the U2000 LCT Software..................................................................................14
1.2.3.1 Starting the U2000 LCT Server..............................................................................................................................14
1.2.3.2 Starting the U2000 LCT Client.............................................................................................................................. 15
1.2.3.3 Checking the Settings of Environment Variables................................................................................................... 16
1.2.3.4 Connecting the U2000 LCT and NEs.....................................................................................................................16
1.3 Installing U2000 LCT in Incremental Mode................................................................................................................ 17
1.4 Removing the U2000 LCT Software............................................................................................................................17
1.4.1 Removal Preparations................................................................................................................................................18
1.4.2 Removal Procedure....................................................................................................................................................19
1.4.3 Checking the Removal Status of the U2000 LCT Server Software.......................................................................... 22

2 Product Description.................................................................................................................... 23
2.1 System Overview..........................................................................................................................................................24
2.1.1 Network Position....................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.1.2 Manageable Equipment............................................................................................................................................. 25
2.1.2.1 MSTP Series Equipment........................................................................................................................................ 25
2.1.2.2 WDM Series Equipment.........................................................................................................................................35
2.1.2.3 PTN Series Equipment........................................................................................................................................... 50
2.1.2.4 Submarine Line Equipment.................................................................................................................................... 56
2.2 Features and Functions................................................................................................................................................. 57
2.2.1 Alarm Management................................................................................................................................................... 57
2.2.2 Performance Management......................................................................................................................................... 71
2.2.3 Security Management................................................................................................................................................ 74
2.2.4 Communication Management....................................................................................................................................75

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide Contents

2.2.5 Report Management.................................................................................................................................................. 77


2.2.6 Configuration Data Management.............................................................................................................................. 77
2.2.7 MSTP NE Management.............................................................................................................................................78
2.2.8 SDH ASON Network Management.......................................................................................................................... 97
2.2.9 WDM/OTN NE Management................................................................................................................................... 98
2.2.10 WDM/OTN NE (NA) Management...................................................................................................................... 106
2.2.11 PTN NE Management............................................................................................................................................ 111
2.2.12 IP NE Management............................................................................................................................................... 134
2.3 System Architecture................................................................................................................................................... 140
2.3.1 Software Structure................................................................................................................................................... 140
2.3.2 External Interfaces................................................................................................................................................... 142

3 Getting Started........................................................................................................................... 143


3.1 Security Precautions (Common Operation)................................................................................................................145
3.2 Starting or Shutting Down the U2000 LCT................................................................................................................145
3.2.1 Deploying the U2000 LCT...................................................................................................................................... 146
3.2.2 Starting the U2000 LCT Server...............................................................................................................................151
3.2.3 Starting the U2000 LCT Client............................................................................................................................... 152
3.2.4 Exiting a U2000 LCT Client................................................................................................................................... 152
3.2.5 Shutting Down the U2000 LCT Server................................................................................................................... 153
3.3 Setting the Character Set of an NE............................................................................................................................. 153
3.3.1 Character Set............................................................................................................................................................153
3.3.2 Setting or Modifying Character Sets....................................................................................................................... 156
3.4 Main Windows and Common Operations of the U2000 LCT....................................................................................157
3.4.1 Client GUI............................................................................................................................................................... 157
3.4.2 Key GUI Components............................................................................................................................................. 158
3.4.3 Frequently Used Buttons......................................................................................................................................... 159
3.4.4 Frequently Used Shortcut Icon................................................................................................................................ 161
3.4.5 Keyboard Shortcuts................................................................................................................................................. 164
3.4.6 Main Windows.........................................................................................................................................................168
3.4.6.1 NE Information Management............................................................................................................................... 168
3.4.6.2 NE Explorer.......................................................................................................................................................... 169
3.4.6.3 VRP8 NE Explorer............................................................................................................................................... 170
3.4.6.4 NE Panel............................................................................................................................................................... 173
3.4.6.5 Browse Alarm.......................................................................................................................................................174
3.4.6.6 Browse Event........................................................................................................................................................175
3.4.6.7 Browse Performance Window.............................................................................................................................. 176
3.4.7 Operations Frequently-Performed on the User Interface.........................................................................................178
3.4.7.1 Customizing Parameter Display........................................................................................................................... 178
3.4.7.2 Copying Table Texts Quickly............................................................................................................................... 179
3.4.7.3 Monitoring Alarms............................................................................................................................................... 179
3.5 How to Obtain Version Information About the U2000 LCT......................................................................................181
3.6 Customizing the Client GUI Effect............................................................................................................................ 181

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide Contents

3.6.1 Setting the Client Skin............................................................................................................................................. 181


3.6.2 Setting the Main Window Title................................................................................................................................182
3.6.3 Setting the Font Size................................................................................................................................................182
3.6.4 Setting the Output Information................................................................................................................................183
3.6.5 Setting the Menu Collapse.......................................................................................................................................185
3.6.6 Highlighting Alarms................................................................................................................................................ 186
3.6.7 Setting the Alarm Font............................................................................................................................................ 187
3.6.8 Setting the Display Properties of New Alarm/Event...............................................................................................188
3.6.9 Setting the Number Format of the Client................................................................................................................ 189
3.6.10 Setting Colors on the Client...................................................................................................................................190
3.6.10.1 Setting Colors..................................................................................................................................................... 190
3.6.10.2 Setting the Alarm Display Mode........................................................................................................................ 192
3.6.10.3 Setting Board Color............................................................................................................................................ 193
3.6.11 Setting the Time and Date Formats of the Client.................................................................................................. 194
3.6.11.1 Setting the Time Format of the Client................................................................................................................ 194
3.6.11.2 Setting the Date Format of the Client................................................................................................................. 195
3.6.12 Setting the Toolbar.................................................................................................................................................196
3.7 Setting the Alert upon Network Disconnections........................................................................................................ 197
3.8 Locking the Client...................................................................................................................................................... 198
3.9 Unlocking the Client...................................................................................................................................................199
3.10 GUI Input and Display Conventions........................................................................................................................ 199

4 FAQs.............................................................................................................................................202
4.1 No Response When Double-clicking the Installer File or the Installation Progress Is Always 0%...........................203
4.2 U2000 LCT Processes Fail to Start Up...................................................................................................................... 203

A Service Ports Description........................................................................................................205


A.1 Background................................................................................................................................................................206
A.2 Notes and Precautions................................................................................................................................................206
A.3 Service Ports to Be Filtered....................................................................................................................................... 206
A.4 Ports Between the U2000 LCT Server and the NEs..................................................................................................206
A.5 Ports Between the U2000 LCT Server and the Clients............................................................................................. 209
A.6 How to Query Service Ports...................................................................................................................................... 213

B Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................214

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

1 Installation Guide

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to install the U2000 LCT.

1.1 Preparing to Install


This section describes the hardware and software required by the U2000 LCT and how to
prepare them before installing the U2000 LCT.
1.2 Installing the U2000 LCT
After preparations are complete, you can install the U2000 LCT.
1.3 Installing U2000 LCT in Incremental Mode
This section describes how to install the U2000 LCT in incremental mode.
1.4 Removing the U2000 LCT Software
This topic describes how to remove the U2000 LCT server software.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

1.1 Preparing to Install


This section describes the hardware and software required by the U2000 LCT and how to
prepare them before installing the U2000 LCT.

1.1.1 Hardware and Software Requirements


This section describes hardware and software requirements of the U2000 LCT.

Hardware Requirements

Table 1-1 Hardware requirements of the U2000 LCT


Item Recommended Requirement

CPU CPU-i5-520M, 2.4 GHz

Memory 4 GB

Hard disk 160 GB

Serial port RS232

Interface 10 or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet

Software Requirements

Table 1-2 Software requirements of the U2000 LCT


Item Requirement

OS l Recommended: Windows 7 Professional


64bit + MSSQL Server 2008 Express
64bit
l Compatible: Windows 7 Professional
32bit + MSSQL Server 2008 Express
32bit

NOTE

The U2000 LCT can be installed only on the simplified Chinese and English editions of Windows OS .
In Windows, it is recommened to install the antivirus software and update it in time. The Trend
OfficeScan antivirus software is preferred.

1.1.2 Obtaining Software


This topic lists the software required for installing the U2000 LCT.
The U2000 LCT can be installed from software packages or a DVD.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

l From software packages: Required software packages must be on-hand. Only Huawei
engineers have the permission to download software packages.
l From a DVD: The DVD must be on-hand, which are delivered alongside the U2000
LCT.
Software packages can be downloaded as follows:
l For carrier:
a. Log in to http://support.huawei.com/carrier.
b. Search for U2000 LCT on the Software, select iManager U2000 LCT in the
search results, and find the desired version.
c. Verify the downloaded software packages. For details, see 1.1.3 Verifying
Downloaded Software Packages by Using PGPVerify.
l For enterprise:
a. Log in to http://support.huawei.com/enterprise.
b. Search for U2000 LCT and select iManager U2000 LCT and select in the search
box on the Support tab. Then, click Downloads and select a desired version.
c. Verify the downloaded software packages. For details, see 1.1.3 Verifying
Downloaded Software Packages by Using PGPVerify.

Table 1-3 Required software


Installation Mode OS Required Software

Using installation packages Windows 7 Professional U2000LCTversion_Base_wi


64bit n32_x86.zip
U2000LCTversion_TransL
CT_win32_x86.zip
U2000LCTversion_server_s
qlserver2008_dbper_en_win
64_x86.zip

Windows 7 Professional U2000LCTversion_Base_wi


32bit n32_x86.zip
U2000LCTversion_TransL
CT_win32_x86.zip
U2000LCTversion_server_s
qlserver2008_dbper_en_win
32_x86.zip

Using a DVD-ROM LCTversion_win32_x86_dv


d1.iso

NOTE

Version indicates the detailed version number of the U2000 LCT.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

1.1.3 Verifying Downloaded Software Packages by Using


PGPVerify
This section uses the PGPVerify tool as an example to describe how to verify software
packages.

Context
l Each software package corresponds to a signature file. They are placed in the same
directory and released together.
l Signature files are in the .asc format and share names with software packages. If a
package is U2000LCTxxxxxx.zip, its signature file will be U2000LCTxxxxxx.zip.asc.
l PGPVerify is a digital signature verification tool released by Huawei. Users can choose
third-party verification tools as needed.
Tool OS Tool Description

PGPVerify Windows, Solaris, Linux An easy-to-use PGP


verification tool released
by Huawei.

GNU Privacy Guard for Windows An official Windows


Windows (Gpg4Win) edition of GnuPG.
Address: http://
www.gpg4win.org/
Recommended version:
2.2.1

The GNU Privacy Guard Linux A free and open-source


(GnuPG) GNU tool that implements
the OpenPGP standards
defined by RFC4880. This
tool is pre-installed on
most Linux OSs.
Address: http://
www.gnupg.org
Recommended version:
2.0.9

Procedure
Step 1 Visit the PGPVerify tool.
l For carrier: visit http://support.huawei.com/carrier/digitalSignatureAction.
l For enterprise: visit http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/toolNewInfoAction!
showDetail?pid=8221819&show=showServiceDetail&versionid=TV1000000016.

Step 2 Download the OpenPGP Signature Verification Guide package and public key file KEYS.

Step 3 Decompress the package. Decompress the resulting VerificationTools.zip to obtain the
PGPVerify tool whose name varies according to the OS, as follows:

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

l Windows: PGPVerify.exe
l Solaris: PGPVerify-sparc.tar.bz2
l Linux: PGPVerify-x86_64.tar.gz

Step 4 Verify software packages.

Windows supports GUI-based verification and CLI-based verification.

l GUI-based verification on Windows OS:


a. Double-click PGPVerify.exe to start PGPVerify.
b. Click Select Public Key, select the obtained public key file KEYS, and load it.
c. Click Multiple Verify and select the C:\PGP directory to verify all files in it.
NOTE

n This step assumes that signature files and software packages are stored in C:\PGP.
n To verify a single file, click Single Verify and select the file to be verified.
The verification result may be one of the following:
n Green: PASS
n Yellow: WARN (For example, the signature file or software version does not
exist.)
n Red: FAIL
If no "WARN" or "FAIL" result appears, the signature file is valid.

NOTICE
If a version has multiple signature files to be verified, the version is secure only
when the verification results of all files are "PASS". If any verification result is
"WARN" or "FAIL", re-download the software package.

l CLI-based verification on Windows:


Run the following command to verify the signature file:
> "C:\PGPVerify.exe" -k "C:\KEYS" -d "C:\PGP"

NOTE

This step assumes that signature files and software packages are stored in C:\PGP and that the
PGPVerify tool and the KEYS file are stored in C:\ directory.
To verify a single file, run the C:\PGPVerify.exe" -k "C:\KEYS" -f "C:
\V200R015C50.zip.asc command.
Information similar to the following is displayed:
[INFO]:Filter file in directory, please wait...
[WARN]:Can't find signature file, signed file position: C:\PGP
\V200R015C50.zip.
[WARN]:Can't find signed file, signature file position: C:\PGP
\V200R015C51.zip.asc.
[FAIL]:Invalid Signature. File path: C:\PGP\V200R015C52.zip.
[PASS]:Good Signature. File path: C:\PGP\V200R015C53.zip, Public key
fingerprint: B1000AC3 8C41525A 19BDC087 99AD81DF 27A74824
[INFO]: Verify Complete.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

NOTE

In the preceding characters, the bold Rivest-Shamir-Adleman (RSA) key ID is consistent with the
public key ID. For a certain file, if no "WARN" or "FAIL" result appears, the signature file is
valid.

NOTICE
If a version has multiple signature files to be verified, the version is secure only when the
verification results of all files are "PASS". If any verification result is "WARN" or
"FAIL", re-download the software package.

----End

1.2 Installing the U2000 LCT


After preparations are complete, you can install the U2000 LCT.

1.2.1 Performing Pre-installation Checks


This section describes the checks that need to be performed before you install the U2000
LCT.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as an administrator.
Step 2 Check that the Windows OS and related patches have been installed. For details, see section
1.1.1 Hardware and Software Requirements.
NOTE

Assume that your OS is Windows 7 Professional SP1. To check whether a patch has been installed,
right-click Computer and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Service Pack x in the Windows
edition area reflects the OS patch that has been installed.

Step 3 Check whether the U2000 has been installed.


NOTE

The U2000 LCT and U2000 cannot be installed on the same OS. If so, the U2000 LCT fails to be used
properly.
1. Check whether the U2000 Client, U2000 System Monitor, U2000 Server, U2000 NMS
Maintenance Suite, and NE Software Management shortcut icons are displayed on the
Windows desktop.
2. Check whether the U2000 server installation path, for example, D:\oss, exists.
Step 4 Check that a database has been installed.
1. Choose Start > All Programs.
2. Check whether the Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or Microsoft SQL Server program
exists. If the program exists, the database has been installed.
l If the SQL Server 2008, SQL Server 2000 or MSDE 2000A database has not been
installed, a database will be installed along with the U2000 LCT.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

l If the SQL Server 2008, SQL Server 2000 or MSDE 2000A database has been installed
and data in the database is sorted in binary mode, the database can be reused for the
U2000 LCT in Step 10. If data in the database is not sorted in binary mode, the database
cannot be reused for the U2000 LCT and you must uninstall the database. For details, see
the follow-up operation in 1.4.2 Removal Procedure.

To check whether data in the SQL Server 2000 or MSDE 2000A is sorted in binary mode,
perform the following steps:
1. Choose Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter the cmd command and click OK to
start the CLI.
2. Run the following command:
C:\> isql -Usa -Psa_password -Sdatabase_name
1> sp_helpsort
2> go

NOTE
If the command output contains binary sort, data in the database is sorted in binary mode.

Step 5 Check that disk C and the disk to which the U2000 LCT will be installed both have more than
10 GB free space.

Step 6 Check that the current language for non-Unicode programs is English (United States).

----End

1.2.2 Installing the U2000 LCT and Database


This topic describes how to install the U2000 LCT.

Prerequisites
l The installation software package is available. For details, see 1.1.2 Obtaining
Software.
l A check is performed for installation. For details, see 1.2.1 Performing Pre-installation
Checks.

Context
l The name of all software installation directories can contain only letters, numbers, and
underscores. The installation fails if a name contains spaces, parentheses, or Chinese
characters.
l Do not change the system time during installation. Otherwise, the installation fails.
l Ensure that the database is running if the database is already installed.
l Ensure that the U2000 is not installed on the OS. For details, see Step 3.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to OS as the administrator.

Step 2 Run the install.bat file to start U2000 LCT installation, as follows:
NOTE

When you run a .bat file, a user account control dialog box may be displayed. In this case, click Yes to
allow the program to make changes to the computer.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

l Mode 1: Installation with a DVD.


a. Insert a U2000 LCT installation DVD into the DVD-ROM.
b. Log in the root directory of the installation disk, copy the required installation
packages to the server according to 1.1.2 Obtaining Software and OS.
c. Decompress the installation package. Decompress the
U2000LCTversion_Base_win32_x86.zip and
U2000LCTversion_TransLCT_win32_x86.zip packages to the same directory, such
as D:\U2000LCT. Copy the database installation package to the D:\U2000LCT
\data\TransLCT directory. Select the database installation package, right-click, and
choose Extract Here from the shortcut menu.
NOTE

n The name of all software installation directories can contain only letters, numbers, and
underscores. The installation fails if a name contains spaces, parentheses, or Chinese
characters.
n To decompress all the files on disk D.
d. Double-click the install.bat file in D:\U2000LCT. The iManager U2000 LCT
Network Management System Installation dialog box will be displayed.
l Mode 2: Installation with a software package.
a. Decompress the installation package. Decompress the
U2000LCTversion_Base_win32_x86.zip and
U2000LCTversion_TransLCT_win32_x86.zip packages to the same directory, such
as D:\U2000LCT. Copy the database installation package to the D:\U2000LCT
\data\TransLCT directory. Select the database installation package, right-click, and
choose Extract Here from the shortcut menu.
NOTE

n The name of all software installation directories can contain only letters, numbers, and
underscores. The installation fails if a name contains spaces, parentheses, or Chinese
characters.
n To decompress all the files on disk D.
b. Double-click the install.bat file in D:\U2000LCT. The iManager U2000 LCT
Network Management System Installation dialog box will be displayed.
Step 3 Wait until the Copyright dialog box is displayed. Click the I accept the terms option button
and click Next.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

Step 4 In the Select Language dialog box, select English and click Next.

Step 5 In the Configure Server dialog box, set Installation Path and Server IP Address and click
Next.
NOTE

The default installation path is Decompression directory/data/TransLCT.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

Step 6 In the Select Domain dialog box, select the desired domains and click Next.

Step 7 The Select Version Style dialog box will be displayed. Select the style as required, such as
Default Style. Click Next.
NOTE

An example of the differences between the two styles: For default style, alarms come in the following
four levels in descending order of severity: Critical, Major, Minor and Warning. For North America
style, alarms come in the following five levels in descending order of severity: Critical, Major, Minor,
Not Alarmed and Not Reported.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

Step 8 Select a timeslot mode, such as Sequential mode (ITU-T G.707), and click Next.
NOTE
The Sequential mode is the international standard mode and is recommended.

Step 9 In the Configure Database dialog box, configure database information and click Next.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

Table 1-4 Parameters for the Microsoft SQL Server 2008 database

Parameter Setting

Data File Path Indicates the storage path of data files. The default path
is D:\data. You can click Browse to change the path.

Server Address Sets the address where the database was located.

Administrator Password Sets the password for administrator user sa. The
database administrator user password must meet the
following requirements. The default value is
Changeme_123.
l The password contains a minimum of eight
characters and a maximum of 30 characters.
l The password must contain at least four of the
following combinations:
At least one lowercase letter
At least one uppercase letter
At least one digit
At least one special character ~@#^*-_+[{}]:./?
The special characters that are not supported
include at least <>&`!$\"%'=;,space. Do not
include these special characters in passwords.
l The password cannot be the same as the user name
written in either the forward or backward format.
l The password cannot contain the complete user
name and case-insensitive.
NOTE
If the database is already installed, the password must be the
same as that of user sa that is set during the database
installation.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

Parameter Setting

OSS Database User Password Sets the OSS database user password. Rules for setting
this password are the same as the rules for setting the
administrator user sa password, such as
Changeme_123.

Reenter OSS Database User Reenters the OSS database user password.
Password

Step 10 In the Preinstallation Check dialog box, view the precheck information. If all items are
normal, click Next.

Step 11 In the Confirm Installation Information dialog box, confirm information and click Next.
Wait until the installation is completed.
NOTE

l If a check item is abnormal, Next becomes unavailable and the installation fails to continue. Address
the abnormality as prompted and click Retry in the Preinstallation Check dialog box until the
check item is displayed properly.
l By default, the U2000 LCT can automatically expand the database based on growth parameters that
are set during database creation. Ensure that the available disk space is greater than the maximum
size that the database can grow before installation. If the available disk space is smaller than the
maximum size that the database can grow, a message in red fonts indicating insufficient available
disk space is displayed.
l During installation, do not leave the PC idle for a long time. Otherwise, the PC enters the
hibernation state and the installation fails.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

Step 12 After the installation is complete, a message indicating successful installation is displayed.
Click Finish. The dialog box asking you whether to restart the OS is displayed.

Step 13 Optional: Installation with a software package, the system automatically installs the database
patch. You can click Yes to restart the OS. For installation with a DVD, click Cancel to not
restart the OS. Navigate to the directory patch\sql2008\en_us of the OS patch package, and
double-click the .exe file. In the Install a SQL Server 2008 Patch dialog box, implement
default installation as the left-side navigation prompts. Click Next to complete the
installation. Restart the OS manually.
NOTE

l If License Terms is displayed, select the I accept the license terms check box and click Next.
l If Ready to Update is displayed, click Update.

Step 14 Click Yes to restart the OS.

Step 15 Enable all-zero IP address monitoring on U2000 LCT.


1. Choose Start > Run. The Run window will be displayed.
2. Enter cmd and click OK.
3. In the CLI, run the follows command.
cd /d D:\U2000LCT\data\TransLCT\server\platform\bin\special
sec_adm -cmd enableListenAllIP

----End

1.2.3 Checking the Installation Result of the U2000 LCT Software


This topic describes how to check the installation result of the U2000 LCT server software.

1.2.3.1 Starting the U2000 LCT Server


This topic describes how to start the U2000 LCT server.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

Prerequisites
The database is started and works properly.

Context
The U2000 LCT server runs as server processes. You can maintain the U2000 LCT server by
using the System Monitor client.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as an administrator.
Step 2 Check the shortcut icons.
The following shortcut icons are displayed on the desktop:
l U2000LCT Client
l U2000LCT Server
l U2000LCT System Monitor
l U2000LCT NMS Maintenance Suite
Step 3 Run the U2000 LCT package decompression directory\data\TransLCT\server\platform
\bin\startnms.bat file to start the U2000 LCT server.
Step 4 Choose Start > Programs > Network Management System > U2000LCT System Monitor
or double-click U2000LCT System Monitor shortcut icon on the desktop to start the System
Monitor.
Step 5 In the Login dialog box, enter the user name and password to log in to the System Monitor
window. The user name is admin and the default password is Changeme_123. You are
required to change the password at your first login.
Step 6 Check whether U2000 LCT processes are started successfully (manually start processes that
adopt the manual startup mode). The U2000 LCT server is started successfully if all processes
are started successfully.

----End

1.2.3.2 Starting the U2000 LCT Client


This topic describes how to start the U2000 LCT client.

Context
After the system is installed, user admin is the default user. User admin is an administrator
user. It has all operation and management rights.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Network Management System > U2000LCT Client or
double-click U2000LCT Client shortcut icon on the desktop.
Step 2 In the Login dialog box, enter the user name and password to log in to the System Monitor
client. The user name is admin and the default password is Changeme_123 by default. You
are required to change the default password at your first login.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

NOTE

If the password has been changed when you start the System Monitor client, use the changed password
for the login.

Step 3 Click Login to enter the NE information list.

----End

1.2.3.3 Checking the Settings of Environment Variables


This topic describes how to check the settings of environment variables after the U2000 LCT
server is installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click Computer and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, click the Advanced system settings from the navigation
tree.

Step 3 In the dialog box that is displayed, click the Advanced tab.

Step 4 Click Environment Variables. In the dialog box that is displayed, environment variables
listed in Table 1-5 must exist in the system environment variable area.

Table 1-5 Environment variables for installing the U2000 LCT server and client
Environment Value
Variable

IMAP_CONFIG_PATH %OSS_ROOT%\server\etc\conf

IMAP_JAVA_HOME U2000 LCT package decompression directory\data\TransLCT


\OSSJRE\jre_win

IMAP_LOCALE UTF-8

IMAP_ROOT %OSS_ROOT%\server

OSS_ROOT U2000 LCT package decompression directory\data\TransLCT

Path %OSS_ROOT%\server\cbb\frame\lib;%OSS_ROOT%\server
\common\alarm\lib;%OSS_ROOT%\server\platform\bin;
%OSS_ROOT%\server\platform\lib;%OSS_ROOT%\server
\platform\lbin;%OSS_ROOT%\server\cbb\platform\lib;
%OSS_ROOT%\server\3rdTools\bin;%OSS_ROOT%\server
\3rdTools\lib;%OSS_ROOT%\server\3rdTools\python\bin;
%OSS_ROOT%\server\3rdTools\python\lib;

----End

1.2.3.4 Connecting the U2000 LCT and NEs


This topic describes how to connect the U2000 LCT and NEs.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Connect NEs and the computer where the U2000 LCT is installed by using Ethernet cables or
serial port cables.
NOTE

For details about positions on NEs into which Ethernet cables or serial port cables are inserted, see
equipment manuals of relevant NEs.

Step 2 Change the IP address of the computer where the U2000 LCT is installed so that the computer
and NEs are in the same subnet.

Step 3 Optional: Perform the following operations on the U2000 if another U2000 has logged in to
the NEs before the U2000 LCT logs in to and manages the NEs: Enable LCT Access Control
for the NEs and then select Serial Port Access Control or Ethernet Access Control in the
Access Control window.

Step 4 Start the U2000 LCT server. For details, see 1.2.3.1 Starting the U2000 LCT Server.

Step 5 Log in to the U2000 LCT client. For details, see 1.2.3.2 Starting the U2000 LCT Client.

Step 6 Click NE Information List and click Auto Discovery on the U2000 LCT client. Click Next
after specifying search criteria. The U2000 LCT and NEs are connected successfully if
connected NEs are displayed.

----End

1.3 Installing U2000 LCT in Incremental Mode


This section describes how to install the U2000 LCT in incremental mode.

Installation Scenario
The U2000 LCT has been installed on a computer, and another LCT needs to be added to
manage certain NEs.

Installation Method

Table 1-6 Installation method


NMS Name Installation Method

U2000 Web LCT For details, see the topic "Installation


Guide" in the U2000 Web LCT User Guide.

IP LCT For details, see the topic "Installation


Guide" in the IP LCT User Guide.

1.4 Removing the U2000 LCT Software


This topic describes how to remove the U2000 LCT server software.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

1.4.1 Removal Preparations


This topic describes how to make preparations for removing the U2000 LCT server software.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights.

Step 2 Shut down all running U2000 LCT clients.

Step 3 Shut down the U2000 LCT server and processes.


NOTE

For example, the installation path of the U2000 LCT is D:\U2000LCT.


1. Double-click the stopserver.bat file in the U2000 LCT path, that is, D:\U2000LCT
\data\TransLCT\engr\engineering, to end the U2000 LCT MSuite processes.
2. Stop U2000 LCT processes.
a. Choose Start > Run. The Run window will be displayed.
b. Enter cmd and click OK.
c. In the CLI, run the daem_ps command to check whether the U2000 LCT process is
stopped.
n If no command output is displayed, the U2000 LCT process has stopped.
n If information similar to the following is displayed, the U2000 LCT process is
not stopped. In the CLI, run the D:\U2000LCT\data\TransLCT\server
\platform\bin\stopnms.bat command to stop the U2000 LCT process.
imapwatchdog.exe 7912 Services 0
8,584 K
ResourceMonitor.exe 6796 Services 0
22,048 K
imapmrb.exe 4836 Services 0
21,416 K
imapsysd.exe 4632 Services 0
32,580 K
imapeventmgr.exe 8004 Services 0
14,052 K
imap_sysmonitor.exe 7688 Services 0
29,272 K
httpd.exe 9300 Services 0
11,772 K
httpd.exe 9936 Services 0
14,176 K
javaw.exe 9180 Services 0
73,352 K

NOTE

Stopping the U2000 LCT process takes about 3 minutes.

Step 4 Choose Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > Configuration Tools > SQL
Server Configuration Manager > SQL Server Services, right-click SQL Server
(MSSQLSERVER), and then choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop the database
server. Then, choose Start to start the database server to ensure that no external user accesses
the SQL Server database.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

NOTE

l If the SQL Server 2000 is installed, click Stop and Start/Continue in the SQL Server service
manager to restart the SQL Server database.
l When removing the U2000 LCT server software, ensure that the IP address is the same as that set
during installation. Otherwise, the U2000 LCT server software fails to be removed.
l Ensure that the database functions properly when removing the U2000 LCT server software. Do not
stop the database. Otherwise, the U2000 LCT server software fails to be removed.

----End

1.4.2 Removal Procedure


This topic describes how to remove the U2000 LCT server software on Windows OS.

Prerequisites
Preparations are made. For details, see 1.4.1 Removal Preparations.

Context
l It is recommended that you should no remove the database when removing the U2000
LCT. If you need to remove the database, remove the database only after the U2000 LCT
is removed. Otherwise, certain data files fail to be deleted.
l If you need to store the database and backup files, manually back up the U2000LCT
installation directory\server\dbbackup directory to another directory other than the
installation directory of the U2000 LCT before removing the U2000 LCT. This directory
is created only after you have performed the backup operation. Otherwise, the directory
does not exist.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to Windows OS as the administrator.

Step 2 Choose Start > All Programs > Network Management System > Uninstall U2000LCT.
NOTE

If a message is displayed indicating that a process is not stopped and therefore the NMS cannot be
uninstalled, right-click the taskbar and choose Start Task Manager from the shortcut menu. In the task
manager, click the Processes tab and select the Show processes from all users check box. Check
whether the ftpdaemon.exe process exists. If the process exists, select the process and click End
Process.

Step 3 Click Next, The Information dialog box will be displayed.

Step 4 Click OK. The Uninstalling dialog box will be displayed.


NOTE

l A message indicating a node connection failure is displayed during removal if the current IP address
is different from the IP address set during installation. Read the failure message carefully, change the
current IP address to the IP address displayed in the message, and then remove the NMS again.
l The SQL Server database is not removed. The removal time depends on installed components. Wait
until the removal is complete.

Step 5 The Uninstallation Completed dialog box is displayed after the removal is complete.

Step 6 Click Finish. The Restart the operating system dialog box will be displayed.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

Step 7 Click Yes to restart the OS.

Step 8 After the OS is restarted, manually delete the U2000 LCT installation path directory.

Step 9 Manually delete the storage path of U2000 LCT database data files.

Step 10 Manually delete the U2000 LCT package decompression directory.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Perform the following operations manually if the SQL Server database needs to be removed:
1. Log in to Windows7 OS as an OS user with administrator rights.
2. Ensure that the database is uninstalled correctly by performing the following steps:
a. Choose Start > Control Panel > Uninstall a program. The Uninstall or change a
program window is displayed.
NOTE

The buttons displayed in Control Panel vary according to the check mode on the upper right
corner. Click the button similar to program.
b. Right-click Microsoft SQL Server 2008 (64-bit) and choose Uninstall/Change.
c. The SQL Server 2008 dialog box will be displayed. Click Remove.
d. The SQL Server 2008 Setup dialog box will be displayed. After operation
completed, click OK.
e. The Select Instance dialog box will be displayed. Select default values, click Next.
f. The Select Features dialog box will be displayed. Select default values, Select the
uninstalled SQL Server features, click Next.
g. The Removal Rules dialog box will be displayed. After operation completed, click
Next.
h. The Ready to Remove dialog box will be displayed. Click Remove.
i. The Removal Progress dialog box will be displayed. Wait for 3 minutes, after
operation completed, click Next.
j. The Complete dialog box will be displayed. Click Close. The SQL Server 2008
removal completed successfully.
k. Uninstall all database components except Microsoft SQL Server 2008 (64-bit).
Sort the components by Name (with the arrow facing upwards), and uninstall the
components one by one from top to bottom. To uninstall a component, right-click it
and choose Uninstall/Change.
NOTE

During uninstallation, a message may be displayed indicating that the computer fails to be
restarted. See 4 to delete PendingFileRenameOperations.
l. Delete the database-related directories and registry information. Navigate to the
directory where the U2000 LCT installation package is stored and double-click the
manual_clean_sqlserver.bat script in the engr\engineering\script directory.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

NOTE

If the information indicating successful deletion is displayed, the database-related directories


and registry information are deleted successfully. Press any key to close the window. If the
engr\engineering\script directory does not contain the manual_clean_sqlserver.bat script,
perform the following operations to delete the directories and registry information about the
database.
1. Delete the MSSQL2008, MSSQLX and MSSQL folders in the installation directory of
the database.
2. Delete the Microsoft SQL Server folder in the Program files folder that is in the
installation directory of the OS.
3. Delete the Microsoft SQL Server and Microsoft SQL Server Compact Edition
folders in the Program files (x86) folder that is in the installation directory of the OS.
4. Choose Start > All Programs. Check whether Microsoft SQL Server 2008 programs
have been deleted. If not, right-click Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and choose Delete
from the shortcut menu.
5. Click Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter regedit to open the registration table,
delete the following registry information:
1. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server
2. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server 2005
Redist
3. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server 2008
Redist
4. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server Native
Client 10.0
5. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\services
\MSSQLSERVER
6. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\services
\SQLSERVERAGENT
7. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\services
\MSSQLServerADHelper
8. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\services
\MSSQLServerADHelper100
9. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\services\MSDTC
10. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session Manager
\PendingFileRenameOperations
11. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion
\Setup\ExceptionComponents
12. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\App
Paths\setup.exe\RunAsOnNonAdminInstall
13. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\App
Paths\setup.exe\BlockOnTSNonInstallMode
14. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\ODBC\ODBC.INI\DBSVR
3. After the preceding operations are performed, restart the OS.
4. Ensure that the registries do not contain the PendingFileRenameOperations key value.
a. Click Start > Run. In the Run dialog box, enter regedit to open the registry.
b. Choose Edit > Find from the main menu. Then, enter
PendingFileRenameOperations and click Find Next.
c. Check that the search result does not include PendingFileRenameOperations. If
PendingFileRenameOperations is included, right-click it and choose Delete from
the shortcut menu.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 1 Installation Guide

1.4.3 Checking the Removal Status of the U2000 LCT Server


Software
This topic describes how to check whether the U2000 LCT server software is removed
completely.

Procedure
Step 1 Verify that the shortcut icons created on the Windows desktop are deleted. Choose Start >
Programs and verify that the NMS is removed.
Step 2 Verify that the installation directory of the U2000 LCT server software (for example, D:
\U2000LCT) is deleted.
Step 3 Verify that the NMS database file is deleted.
1. Choose start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > SQL Server
Management Studio. The Connect to Server window is displayed. Enter a password
for user sa, and click Connect.
2. Choose Databases for the local server from the navigation tree. Ensure that all databases
have been deleted, except System Databases and Database Snapshots.
NOTE

If the SQL Server 2000 is installed, choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Enterprise
Manager. The SQL Server Enterprise Manager window will be displayed. Then, choose Databases
for the local server from the navigation tree. Ensure that all databases have been deleted, except master,
model, msdb, pubs, tempdb, and Northwind.

----End

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

2 Product Description

About This Chapter

iManager U2000 local craft terminal (U2000 LCT) is an NE layer management system for the
optical transport network. The U2000 LCT uniformly manages OptiX series optical
transmission equipment from Huawei, such as MSTP, WDM, PTN and submarine NEs.
2.1 System Overview
This section describes the position, functions, and manageable NEs of the U2000 LCT.
2.2 Features and Functions
This section describes the NE management features and functions provided by the U2000
LCT.
2.3 System Architecture
The U2000 LCT provides the standard client/server architecture.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

2.1 System Overview


This section describes the position, functions, and manageable NEs of the U2000 LCT.

2.1.1 Network Position


The OptiX iManager U2000 LCT (local craft terminal) (U2000 LCT for short) is produced by
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. (hereinafter referred to as Huawei). It provides solutions for
the transport network NE management.
In TMN hierarchical structure, the U2000 LCT is located at EML, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 The position of the U2000 LCT in TMN

BMS: Business Management System

SMS: Service Management System

NMS: Network Management System

SNMS: Subnetwork Management System

EMS: Element Management System

GNE: Gateway Network Element

NE: Network Element

The U2000 LCT provides the users with single-layer management network solutions to the
transmission networks of up to 32 NEs to realize integrated management of multi-service
transmission network. Usually it uses the Ethernet cable or serial port cable to connect the
GNE, so as to configure and maintain the NEs.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

2.1.2 Manageable Equipment


The U2000 LCT can uniformly manage OptiX series optical transmission equipment from
Huawei, such as MSTP, WDM, PTN and submarine NEs.

2.1.2.1 MSTP Series Equipment


The following table lists the MSTP series NE supported.

Table 2-1 MSTP series equipment

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS Version


Supported

OSN series OptiX OSN 5.51.05.20 (V100R002C00) Earlier than


9560 V100R009C00
5.51.06.10 (V100R005C00)

5.51.07.10 (V100R006C00)

5.51.07.30-5.51.07.59
(V100R006C01)

5.51.08.10 (V100R007C00)

OptiX OSN 5.15.01.10 Earlier than


9500 V100R009C00
5.15.01.20

5.15.01.30

5.15.02.10

5.15.02.11

5.15.02.20

5.15.03.20

5.15.03.26

5.15.03.30

5.15.04.10

5.15.05.10

5.15.06.10 (V100R006C00)

5.15.06.30 (V100R006C03)

5.15.06.50
(V100R006C05SPC200)

OptiX OSN 5.21.31.50 (V200R011C01) Earlier than


7500 II V100R009C00
5.21.31.60 (V200R011C02)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS Version


Supported

5.21.31.70 (V200R011C03)

5.21.32.10 (V200R012C00)

5.21.32.50 (V200R012C01)

5.21.33.10 (V200R013C00) V100R009C00

5.21.33.30 (V200R013C10) V200R001C00

5.21.33.50 (V200R013C20) V200R014C50

5.21.33.70 (V200R013C30) V200R014C60

5.21.34.10 (V200R015C00) V200R015C50

5.21.34.30 (V200R015C10) V200R015C60

5.21.34.60 (V200R015C20) V200R016C50

OptiX OSN 5.21.13.40 Earlier than


7500 V100R009C00
5.21.14.10

5.21.14.30-5.21.14.49

5.21.15.10-5.21.15.99

5.21.16.10

5.21.17.10

5.21.18.10 (V100R008C01)

5.21.18.40 (V100R008C02)

5.21.19.10 (V100R009C01)

5.21.19.40 (V100R009C02)

5.21.31.10 (V100R009C05)

5.21.20.10 (V100R010C00)

5.21.20.40 (V100R010C02)

5.21.20.50 (V100R010C03)

5.21.31.30 (V200R011C00)

5.21.31.50 (V200R011C01)

5.21.31.60 (V200R011C02)

5.21.31.70 (V200R011C03)

5.21.32.10 (V200R012C00)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS Version


Supported

5.21.32.50 (V200R012C01)

5.21.33.10 (V200R013C00) V100R009C00

5.21.33.30 (V200R013C10) V200R001C00

5.21.33.50 (V200R013C20) V200R014C50

5.21.33.70 (V200R013C30) V200R014C60

5.21.34.10 (V200R015C00) V200R015C50

5.21.34.30 (V200R015C10) V200R015C60

5.21.34.60 (V200R015C20) V200R016C50

OptiX OSN 5.21.01.10 Earlier than


3500 V100R009C00
5.21.12.10

5.21.12.40

5.21.13.40

5.21.14.10

5.21.14.30-5.21.14.49

5.21.15.10-5.21.15.99

5.21.16.10

5.21.17.10

5.21.18.10 (V100R008C01)

5.21.18.40 (V100R008C02)

5.21.18.44

5.21.19.10 (V100R009C01)

5.21.19.40 (V100R009C02)

5.21.30.10 (V100R009C03)

5.21.31.10 (V100R009C05)

5.21.20.10 (V100R010C00)

5.21.20.40 (V100R010C02)

5.21.20.50 (V100R010C03)

5.21.31.30 (V200R011C00)

5.21.31.50 (V200R011C01)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS Version


Supported

5.21.31.60 (V200R011C02)

5.21.31.70 (V200R011C03)

5.21.32.10 (V200R012C00)

5.21.32.50 (V200R012C01)

5.21.33.10 (V200R013C00) V100R009C00

5.21.33.30 (V200R013C10) V200R001C00

5.21.33.50 (V200R013C20) V200R014C50

5.21.33.70 (V200R013C30) V200R014C60

5.21.34.10 (V200R015C00) V200R015C50

5.21.34.30 (V200R015C10) V200R015C60

5.21.34.60 (V200R015C20) V200R016C50

OptiX OSN 5.21.33.10 (V200R013C00) V100R009C00


3580
5.21.33.30 (V200R013C10) V200R001C00

5.21.33.50 (V200R013C20) V200R014C50

5.21.33.70 (V200R013C30) V200R014C60

5.21.34.10 (V200R015C00) V200R015C50

5.21.34.30 (V200R015C10) V200R015C60

5.21.34.60 (V200R015C20) V200R016C50

OptiX OSN 5.27.01.10 Earlier than


2500 V100R009C00
5.27.12.10

5.36.12.10

5.36.12.40

5.36.13.40

5.36.14.10

5.36.14.30-5.36.14.49

5.36.15.10-5.36.15.99

5.36.16.10

5.36.17.10

5.36.18.10 (V100R008C01)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS Version


Supported

5.36.18.40 (V100R008C02)

5.36.19.10 (V100R009C01)

5.36.19.40 (V100R009C02)

5.36.20.10 (V100R010C00)

5.36.20.40 (V100R010C02)

5.36.20.50 (V100R010C03)

OptiX OSN 5.36.11.10 Earlier than


1500 V100R009C00
5.36.12.10

5.36.12.40

5.36.13.40

5.36.14.10

5.36.14.30-5.36.14.49

5.36.15.10-5.36.15.99

5.36.16.10

5.36.17.10

5.36.18.10 (V100R008C01)

5.36.18.40 (V100R008C02)

5.36.19.10 (V100R009C01)

5.36.19.40 (V100R009C02)

5.36.30.10 (V100R009C03)

5.36.20.10 (V100R010C00)

5.36.20.40 (V100R010C02)

5.36.20.50 (V100R010C03)

5.36.31.30 (V200R011C00)

5.36.31.50 (V200R011C01)

5.36.31.60 (V200R011C02)

5.36.31.70 (V200R011C03)

5.36.32.10 (V200R012C00)

5.36.32.50 (V200R012C01)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS Version


Supported

5.36.33.10 (V200R013C00) V100R009C00

5.36.33.30 (V200R013C10) V200R001C00

5.36.33.50 (V200R013C20) V200R014C50

5.36.33.70 (V200R013C30) V200R014C60

5.36.34.10 (V200R015C00) V200R015C50

5.36.34.30 (V200R015C10) V200R015C60

5.36.34.60 (V200R015C20) V200R016C50

OptiX OSN 5.50.01.10 Earlier than


2000 V100R009C00
5.50.02.10

5.50.02.20 (V100R002)

5.50.03.10 (V100R003)

OptiX OSN 5.81.03.10 (V100R003C00) Earlier than


550 V100R009C00
5.81.05.10 (V100R005C00)

5.81.05.20 (V100R005C01)

5.81.05.30 (V100R005C02)

5.81.06.10 (V100R006C00)

5.81.06.20 (V100R006C01)

5.81.07.10 (V100R007C00) V100R009C00

5.81.07.20 (V100R007C10) V200R001C00

5.81.07.30 (V100R007C20) V200R014C50

5.81.07.40 (V100R007C30) V200R014C60

5.81.08.10 (V100R008C00) V200R015C50

5.81.08.20 (V100R008C10) V200R015C60

5.81.08.30 (V100R008C20) V200R016C50

OptiX OSN 5.62.01.10 Earlier than


500 V100R009C00
5.62.02.10

5.62.03.10 (V100R003C00)

5.62.05.10 (V100R005C00)

5.62.05.30 (V100R005C02)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS Version


Supported

5.62.06.10 (V100R006C00)

5.62.06.20 (V100R006C01)

5.62.07.10 (V100R007C00) V100R009C00

5.62.07.20 (V100R007C10) V200R001C00

5.62.07.30 (V100R007C20) V200R014C50

5.62.07.40 (V100R007C30) V200R014C60

5.62.08.10 (V100R008C00) V200R015C50

5.62.08.20 (V100R008C10) V200R015C60

5.62.08.30 (V100R008C20) V200R016C50

OptiX OSN 5.43.13.10 Earlier than


2500REG V100R009C00
5.36.13.40

5.36.18.40

OptiX OSN 5.119.05.10 (V100R005C00) Earlier than


50 V100R009C00

OptiX OSN 5.120.03.10 (V100R003C00) Earlier than


80 V100R009C00

OptiX OSN 5.125.07.20 (V100R007C10) V200R001C00


580
5.125.07.30 (V100R007C20) V200R014C50

5.125.07.40 (V100R007C30) V200R014C60

5.125.08.10 (V100R008C00) V200R015C50

5.125.08.20 (V100R008C10) V200R015C60

5.125.08.30 (V100R008C20) V200R016C50

SDH series OptiX 155S 4.02.88.10 Earlier than


V100R009C00
4.02.88.20

OptiX 155C 4.04.00.08 Earlier than


V100R009C00
4.04.02.04

OptiX 4.01.16.20 Earlier than


155/622 V100R009C00
(Metro 4.01.16.21
2050), OptiX 4.01.16.22
2500, OptiX
155/622B, 4.01.17.01

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS Version


Supported

OptiX 4.01.17.02
2500REG
4.01.17.03

4.01.17.04

4.01.18.10

OptiX 4.02.05.04 Earlier than


155/622H, V100R009C00
OptiX 4.02.05.05
155/622H 4.02.05.06
(Metro
1000), OptiX 4.02.06.03
155A
4.02.06.04

4.02.06.06

4.02.06.07

4.02.06.10

4.02.06.20

4.02.06.30

4.02.06.31

4.02.06.40

4.02.06.41

4.02.06.50

4.02.06.53

4.02.06.60

OptiX 4.05.03.02 Earlier than


2500+, V100R009C00
OptiX 2500+ 4.05.03.10
(Metro 3000) 4.05.03.20

4.05.03.33

4.05.03.36

4.05.03.40

4.05.04.15

4.05.04.16

4.05.05.10

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS Version


Supported

4.05.06.10

4.05.06.15

4.05.06.30

4.05.06.40

4.05.06.41

4.05.07.10

4.05.08.10

4.05.09.10

4.05.10.10

OptiX 10G 5.10.01.01 Earlier than


MADM V100R009C00
(Metro5000) 5.10.01.10

5.10.01.20

5.10.02.10

5.10.03.10

5.10.04.10

5.10.04.30

5.10.04.35

5.10.04.40

5.10.05.10

5.10.05.20

5.10.06.10

5.10.06.30

5.10.06.40

5.42.01.10 Earlier than


V100R009C00
5.42.01.20

OptiX Metro 5.42.01.30


MSTP series
100 5.42.02.10

5.42.03.10

5.42.03.20

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS Version


Supported

5.42.05.10 (V100R005C00)

5.24.01.10 Earlier than


V100R009C00
5.24.02.20
OptiX Metro
5.24.03.10
200
5.24.04.10

5.24.04.20

5.17.01.10 Earlier than


V100R009C00
5.17.01.20

5.24.02.20

OptiX Metro 5.24.03.10


500 5.24.04.10

5.24.04.20

5.24.05.10

5.24.04.30

5.37.01.10 Earlier than


V100R009C00
5.37.02.10

5.37.02.20

5.37.02.30

5.37.03.10 (V300R003)
OptiX Metro
5.37.04.10 (V300R004)
1000V3
5.37.05.10 (V300R005)

5.37.06.10 (V300R006)

5.37.07.10 (V300R007C00)

5.37.07.20 (V300R007C01)

5.37.07.30 (V300R007C02)

5.19.01.10 Earlier than


V100R009C00
OptiX Metro 5.19.01.20
1050 5.19.02.10

5.19.03.10

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS Version


Supported

5.19.04.10

5.19.04.20

5.19.04.30

5.13.01.10 Earlier than


V100R009C00
OptiX Metro 5.13.01.11
1100 5.13.02.20

5.13.02.30

4.12.02.01 Earlier than


V100R009C00
4.12.02.02

4.12.02.10
OptiX Metro
4.12.02.15
3100
4.12.02.20

4.12.03.10

4.12.03.20

NOTE

Mapping principle:
1. If the mapping table provides only the information that a.bb.cc.20 is supported by version A of the
U2000 LCT, a.bb.cc.2x is supported by version A of the U2000 LCT.
2. If the mapping table provides only the information that a.bb.cc is supported by version A of
theU2000 LCT, a.bb.cc.xx is supported by version A of the U2000 LCT.
Rules for defining commercial versions of NE software: a.bb.cc.dd. "a" indicates the NE platform
version. Currently, 4, 5 and 8 are supported. "bb" indicates the product name. "cc" indicates the R
version of the product. To be specific, 01 represents R001, 02 represents R002, and so on. "dd" indicates
the C version of the product.

2.1.2.2 WDM Series Equipment


The following table lists the WDM series equipment supported.

Table 2-2 WDM Series Equipment

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

NG WDM series OptiX OSN 1800 5.67.01.10(V100R0 Earlier than


I/II 01) V100R009C00

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

5.67.01.20

5.67.02.10
(V100R002C00)

5.67.03.10
(V100R003C00)

5.67.03.20
(V100R003C01)

5.67.03.30
(V100R003C02)

5.67.03.40
(V100R003C03)

5.67.03.50
(V100R003C05)

5.67.03.20~5.67.03. V200R001C00
90(V100R005C00)

5.141.05.11(F3SCC) V200R014C60
(V100R005C20)

5.67.06.11(F1SCC) V200R015C50
(V100R006C00)

5.141.06.11(F3SCC)
(V100R006C00)

5.67.06.21(F1SCC) V200R015C60
(V100R006C10)

5.141.06.21(F3SCC)
(V100R006C10)

5.67.06.31(F1SCC) V200R016C50
(V100R006C20)

5.141.06.31(F3SCC)
(V100R006C20)

Optix OSN 1800 5.67.03.91 Earlier than


II(Packet) (V100R003C05) V100R009C00

5.67.05.11 V200R001C00
(V100R005C00)

5.67.05.20 V200R014C50
(V100R005C10)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

5.67.05.30 V200R014C60
(V100R005C20)

5.67.03.60 V100R009C00
(V100R003C05)

5.67.06.11 V200R015C50
(V100R006C00)

5.67.06.21 V200R015C60
(V100R006C10)

5.67.06.31 V200R016C50
(V100R006C20)

OptiX OSN 1800V 5.67.05.11 V200R001C00


(V100R005C00)

5.67.05.20 V200R014C50
(V100R005C10)

5.67.05.30 V200R014C60
(V100R005C20)

5.67.06.11 V200R015C50
(V100R006C00)

5.67.06.21 V200R015C60
(V100R006C10)

5.67.06.31 V200R016C50
(V100R006C20)

OptiX OSN 1832 5.67.03.60 V100R009C00


X16 (V100R003C05)

5.67.05.11 V200R001C00
(V100R005C00)

5.67.05.20 V200R014C50
(V100R005C10)

5.67.05.30 V200R014C60
(V100R005C20)

5.67.06.11 V200R015C50
(V100R006C00)

5.67.06.21 V200R015C60
(V100R006C10)

5.67.06.31 V200R016C50
(V100R006C20)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

OptiX OSN 1832 5.67.03.91 V100R009C00


X8 (V100R003C05)

5.67.05.11 V200R001C00
(V100R005C00)

5.67.05.20 V200R014C50
(V100R005C10)

5.67.05.30 V200R014C60
(V100R005C20)

5.67.06.11 V200R015C50
(V100R006C00)

5.67.06.21 V200R015C60
(V100R006C10)

5.67.06.31 V200R016C50
(V100R006C20)

OptiX OSN 1832 5.51.08.10 Earlier than


(V100R007C00) V100R009C00

5.51.08.30
(V100R007C02)

5.51.09.10 V100R009C00
(V100R008C00)

5.51.09.30 V200R014C50
(V100R008C10)

5.51.10.10 V200R014C60
(V100R009C00)

5.51.10.30 V200R014C60
(V100R009C10)

5.51.11.10 V200R015C50
(V100R010C00)

5.51.11.30 V200R015C60
(V100R010C10)

5.51.12.10 V200R016C50
(V100R011C00)

OptiX OSN 3800 5.52.01.10 Earlier than


V100R009C00
5.52.02.10

5.52.03.20

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

5.52.04.10

5.52.04.20
(V100R004C02)

5.52.04.30
(V100R004C03)

5.52.05.20
(V100R004C04)

5.51.06.10
(V100R005C00)

5.51.07.10
(V100R006C00)

5.51.07.30
(V100R006C01)

5.51.07.60
(V100R006C03)

5.51.08.10
(V100R007C00)

5.51.08.30
(V100R007C02)

5.51.09.10 V100R009C00
(V100R008C00)

5.51.09.30 V200R014C50
(V100R008C10)

5.51.10.10 V200R014C60
(V100R009C00)

5.51.10.30
(V100R009C10)

5.51.11.10 V200R015C50
(V100R010C00)

5.51.11.30 V200R015C60
(V100R010C10)

5.51.12.10 V200R016C50
(V100R011C00)

OptiX OSN 6800 5.51.01.10 Earlier than


V100R009C00
5.51.02.10

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

5.51.03.20

5.51.04.10

5.51.04.20
(V100R004C02)

5.52.04.30
(V100R004C03)

5.51.05.20
(V100R004C04)

5.51.06.10
(V100R005C00)

5.51.07.10
(V100R006C00)

5.51.07.30
(V100R006C01)

5.51.07.60
(V100R006C03)

5.51.08.10
(V100R007C00)

5.51.08.30
(V100R007C02)

5.51.09.10 V100R009C00
(V100R008C00)

5.51.09.30 V200R014C50
(V100R008C10)

5.51.10.10 V200R014C60
(V100R009C00)

5.51.10.30
(V100R009C10)

5.51.11.10 V200R015C50
(V100R010C00)

5.51.11.30 V200R015C60
(V100R010C10)

5.51.12.10 V200R016C50
(V100R011C00)

OptiX OSN 8800 5.51.07.10 Earlier than


T16 (V100R006C00) V100R009C00

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

5.51.07.30
(V100R006C01)

5.51.07.60
(V100R006C03)

5.51.08.10
(V100R007C00)

5.51.08.30
(V100R007C02)

5.51.09.10 V100R009C00
(V100R008C00)

5.51.09.30 V200R014C50
(V100R008C10)

5.51.10.10 V200R014C60
(V100R009C00)

5.51.10.30
(V100R009C10)

5.51.11.10 V200R015C50
(V100R010C00)

5.51.11.30 V200R015C60
(V100R010C10)

5.51.12.10 V200R016C50
(V100R011C00)

OptiX OSN 8800 5.51.04.20 Earlier than


T32 (V100R001C01) V100R009C00

5.51.04.30
(V100R001C02)

5.51.05.20
(V100R002C00)

5.51.05.21
(V100R002C02)

5.51.06.10
(V100R005C00)

5.51.07.10
(V100R006C00)

5.51.07.30
(V100R006C01)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

5.51.07.60
(V100R006C03)

5.51.08.10
(V100R007C00)

5.51.08.30
(V100R007C02)

5.51.09.10 V100R009C00
(V100R008C00)

5.51.09.30 V200R014C50
(V100R008C10)

5.51.10.10 V200R014C60
(V100R009C00)

5.51.10.30
(V100R009C10)

5.51.11.10 V200R015C50
(V100R010C00)

5.51.11.30 V200R015C60
(V100R010C10)

5.51.12.10 V200R016C50
(V100R011C00)

OptiX OSN 8800 5.51.05.20 Earlier than


T64 (V100R002C00) V100R009C00

5.51.05.21
(V100R002C02)

5.51.06.10
(V100R005C00)

5.51.07.10
(V100R006C00)

5.51.07.30
(V100R006C01)

5.51.07.60
(V100R006C03)

5.51.08.10
(V100R007C00)

5.51.08.30
(V100R007C02)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

5.51.09.10 V100R009C00
(V100R008C00)

5.51.09.30 V200R014C50
(V100R008C10)

5.51.10.10 V200R014C60
(V100R009C00)

5.51.10.30
(V100R009C10)

5.51.11.10 V200R015C50
(V100R010C00)

5.51.11.30 V200R015C60
(V100R010C10)

5.51.12.10 V200R016C50
(V100R011C00)

OptiX OSN 8800 5.51.08.10 Earlier than


(V100R007C00) V100R009C00

5.51.08.30
(V100R007C02)

5.51.09.10 V100R009C00
(V100R008C00)

5.51.09.30 V200R014C50
(V100R008C10)

5.51.10.10 V200R014C60
(V100R009C00)

5.51.10.30
(V100R009C10)

5.51.11.10 V200R015C50
(V100R010C00)

5.51.11.30 V200R015C60
(V100R010C10)

5.51.12.10 V200R016C50
(V100R011C00)

OptiX OSN 9600 5.51.09.10 V100R009C00


(V100R008C00)

5.51.09.30 V200R014C50
(V100R008C10)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

5.51.10.10 V200R014C60
(V100R009C00)

5.51.10.30
(V100R009C10)

5.51.11.10 V200R015C50
(V100R010C00)

5.51.11.30 V200R015C60
(V100R010C10)

5.51.12.10 V200R016C50
(V100R011C00)

OptiX OSN 9600 5.111.01.80 V200R014C60


U16 (V100R001C30)

5.111.02.30 V200R015C50
(V100R002C10)

5.111.03.10 V200R015C60
(V100R003C00)

5.111.03.30 V200R016C50
(V100R003C10)

OptiX OSN 9600 5.111.01.10 Earlier than


U32 (V100R001C00) V100R009C00

5.111.01.30 V100R009C00
(V100R001C01)

5.111.01.60 V200R001C00
(V100R001C20)

5.111.01.80 V200R014C60
(V100R001C30)

5.111.02.30 V200R015C50
(V100R002C10)

5.111.03.10 V200R015C60
(V100R003C00)

5.111.03.30 V200R016C50
(V100R003C10)

OptiX OSN 9600 5.111.01.10 Earlier than


U64 (V100R001C00) V100R009C00

5.111.01.30 V100R009C00
(V100R001C01)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

5.111.01.60 V200R001C00
(V100R001C20)

5.111.01.80 V200R014C60
(V100R001C30)

5.111.02.30 V200R015C50
(V100R002C10)

5.111.03.10 V200R015C60
(V100R003C00)

5.111.03.30 V200R016C50
(V100R003C10)

OptiX OSN 9800 5.51.08.30 V100R009C00


(V100R007C02)

5.51.09.10
(V100R008C00)

5.51.09.30 V200R014C50
(V100R008C10)

5.51.10.10 V200R014C60
(V100R009C00)

5.51.10.30
(V100R009C10)

5.51.11.10 V200R015C50
(V100R010C00)

5.51.11.30 V200R015C60
(V100R010C10)

5.51.12.10 V200R016C50
(V100R011C00)

OptiX OSN 9800 5.111.01.80 V200R014C60


U16 (V100R001C30)

5.111.02.30 V200R015C50
(V100R002C10)

5.111.03.10 V200R015C60
(V100R003C00)

5.111.03.30 V200R016C50
(V100R003C10)

OptiX OSN 9800 5.111.01.10 Earlier than


U32 (V100R001C00) V100R009C00

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

5.111.01.30 V100R009C00
(V100R001C01)

5.111.01.60 V200R001C00
(V100R001C20)

5.111.01.80 V200R014C60
(V100R001C30)

5.111.02.30 V200R015C50
(V100R002C10)

5.111.03.10 V200R015C60
(V100R003C00)

5.111.03.30 V200R016C50
(V100R003C10)

OptiX OSN 9800 5.111.01.10 Earlier than


U64 (V100R001C00) V100R009C00

5.111.01.30 V100R009C00
(V100R001C01)

5.111.01.60 V200R001C00
(V100R001C20)

5.111.01.80 V200R014C60
(V100R001C30)

5.111.02.30 V200R015C50
(V100R002C10)

5.111.03.10 V200R015C60
(V100R003C00)

5.111.03.30 V200R016C50
(V100R003C10)

Metro WDM series OptiX BWS 320G 4.08.04.04 Earlier than


& LH WDM series (OAS/OCI/OIS) V100R009C00
4.08.04.05

4.08.04.10

4.08.04.20

OptiX BWS 5.08.01.30 V200R016C50Earlie


320GV3 r than
5.08.02.10 V100R009C00
5.08.02.20

5.08.03.10

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

OptiX BWS 1600G 5.08.01.20 Earlier than


V100R009C00
5.08.01.30

5.08.02.20

5.08.02.21

5.08.02.22

5.08.02.23

5.08.03.10

5.08.03.11

5.08.04.10

5.08.03.70-5.08.03.9
9

5.08.05.10

5.08.06.10

5.08.06.20

5.08.06.40

5.08.07.10
(V100R007C01)

5.08.07.20
(V100R007C02)

5.08.07.30
(V100R007C03)

OptiX BWS 1600G 5.08.04.10 Earlier than


OLA V100R009C00
5.08.05.10

5.08.06.10

5.08.06.40

5.08.07.10
(V100R007C01)

5.08.07.20
(V100R007C02)

5.08.07.30
(V100R007C03)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

OptiX OTU40000 V2.0 Earlier than


V100R009C00

OptiX Metro 6020 5.04.01.03 Earlier than


V100R009C00

OptiX Metro 6040 5.18.01.10 Earlier than


V100R009C00
5.18.01.20

OptiX Metro 5.26.01.10 Earlier than


6040V2 V100R009C00
5.26.01.20

5.26.01.30

5.39.01.30

5.39.01.40

5.39.01.42

5.39.02.10
(V100R006)

5.39.02.20
(V100R006C02)

5.39.03.10
(V100R007C01)

5.39.03.20
(V100R007C02)

5.39.03.33
(V100R007C03)

5.39.03.61

5.39.04.10
(V100R008C01)

OptiX Metro 6100 4.09.02.03 Earlier than


V100R009C00
4.09.02.05

OptiX Metro 5.08.01.40 Earlier than


6100V1 V100R009C00
5.08.02.10

5.08.02.20

5.08.02.21

5.08.02.22

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software Version First NMS


Version
Supported

5.08.03.10

OptiX Metro 5.39.01.10 Earlier than


6100V1E V100R009C00
5.39.01.20

5.39.01.40

5.39.01.42

5.39.02.10
(V100R006)

5.39.02.20
(V100R006C02)

5.39.03.10
(V100R007C01)

5.39.03.20
(V100R007C02)

5.39.03.33
(V100R007C03)

5.39.03.61

5.39.04.10
(V100R008C01)

5.39.05.10
(V100R008C04)

OptiX OSN 900A 5.53.01.10 Earlier than


V100R009C00

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

NOTE

l Different from OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and other devices, OptiX OSN 8800 is a platform-based
device.
l Different from OptiX OSN 9600 U32 and other devices, OptiX OSN 9600 is a platform-based
device.
l Different from OptiX OSN 9800 U32 and other devices, OptiX OSN 9800 is a platform-based
device.
l The OptiX BWS 1600G OLA is an independent power supply subrack. It is supported by the OptiX
BWS 1600G backbone DWDM optical transmission system V100R004 and later versions.
l Mapping principle:
1. If the mapping table provides only the information that a.bb.cc.20 is supported by version A of
the U2000 LCT, a.bb.cc.2x is supported by version A of the U2000 LCT.
2. If the mapping table provides only the information that a.bb.cc is supported by version A of
theU2000 LCT, a.bb.cc.xx is supported by version A of the U2000 LCT.
Rules for defining commercial versions of NE software: a.bb.cc.dd. "a" indicates the NE platform
version. Currently, 4, 5 and 8 are supported. "bb" indicates the product name. "cc" indicates the R
version of the product. To be specific, 01 represents R001, 02 represents R002, and so on. "dd"
indicates the C version of the product.

2.1.2.3 PTN Series Equipment


The following table lists the PTN series equipment supported.

Table 2-3 PTN series equipment (Transport)

Categor Equipment Software Version First U2000 Version


y Supported

PTN Optix PTN 1900 5.58.01.10 (V100R001C01) Earlier than V100R009C00


series
5.58.01.30 (V100R001C02)

5.58.01.50 (V100R001C03)

5.58.02.10 (V100R002C00)

5.58.02.30 (V100R002C01)

5.58.02.50 (V100R002C02)

5.58.02.60 (V100R002C03)

5.58.02.90
(V100R002C02SPC600)

5.58.03.20 (V100R003C01)

5.58.03.30 (V100R003C02)

5.58.05.10 (V100R005C00)

5.58.05.30 (V100R005C01)

5.58.06.30 (V100R006C10) V200R014C60

5.78.07.10 (V100R007C00) V200R015C50

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Categor Equipment Software Version First U2000 Version


y Supported

5.58.07.30 (V100R007C10) V200R015C60

Optix PTN 5.78.02.50 (V100R002C02) Earlier than V100R009C00


3900-8
5.78.02.60 (V100R002C03)

5.78.02.70 (V100R002C05)

5.78.02.90
(V100R002C02SPC600)

5.78.03.20 (V100R003C01)

5.78.03.30 (V100R003C02)

5.78.05.10 (V100R005C00)

5.78.05.30 (V100R005C01)

5.78.06.30 (V100R006C10) V200R014C60

5.78.07.10 (V100R007C00) V200R015C50

5.78.07.30 (V100R007C10) V200R015C60

Optix PTN 3900 5.59.01.10 (V100R001C01) Earlier than V100R009C00

5.59.01.30 (V100R001C02)

5.59.01.50 (V100R001C03)

5.59.02.10 (V100R002C00)

5.59.02.30 (V100R002C01)

5.59.02.50 (V100R002C02)

5.59.02.60 (V100R002C03)

5.59.02.70 (V100R002C05)

5.59.02.90
(V100R002C02SPC600)

5.59.03.20 (V100R003C01)

5.59.03.30 (V100R003C02)

5.59.05.10 (V100R005C00)

5.59.05.30 (V100R005C01)

5.59.06.30 (V100R006C10) V200R014C60

5.59.07.10 (V100R007C00) V200R015C50

5.59.07.30 (V100R007C10) V200R015C60

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Categor Equipment Software Version First U2000 Version


y Supported

Optix PTN 912 5.63.01.10 (V100R001C01) Earlier than V100R009C00

5.63.01.50 (V100R001C02)

OptiX PTN 910 5.64.01.10 (V100R001C00) Earlier than V100R009C00

5.64.01.50 (V100R001C01)

5.64.02.10 (V100R002C00)

5.64.02.50 (V100R002C01)

5.64.02.60 (V100R002C03)

5.64.02.70 (V100R002C05)

5.64.02.80
(V100R002C01SPC800)

5.64.02.90
(V100R002C01SPC600)

5.64.03.20 (V100R003C01)

5.64.03.30 (V100R003C02)

5.64.05.10 (V100R005C00)

5.64.05.30 (V100R005C01)

5.64.06.30(V100R006C10) V200R014C60

5.64.07.10 (V100R007C00) V200R015C50

5.64.07.30 (V100R007C10) V200R015C60

OptiX PTN 950 5.65.01.10 (V100R001C00) Earlier than V100R009C00

5.65.01.50 (V100R001C01)

5.65.02.10 (V100R002C00)

5.65.02.50 (V100R002C01)

5.65.02.60 (V100R002C03)

5.65.02.70 (V100R002C05)

5.65.02.80
(V100R002C01SPC800)

5.65.02.90
(V100R002C01SPC600)

5.65.03.20 (V100R003C01)

5.65.03.30 (V100R003C02)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Categor Equipment Software Version First U2000 Version


y Supported

5.65.05.10 (V100R005C00)

5.65.05.30 (V100R005C01)

5.65.06.30 (V100R006C10) V200R014C60

5.65.07.10 (V100R007C00) V200R015C50

5.65.07.30 (V100R007C10) V200R015C60

OptiX PTN 905 5.88.02.80 (V100R002C05) Earlier than V100R009C00

OptiX PTN 910- 5.91.03.30 (V100R003C02) Earlier than V100R009C00


F
5.91.05.10 (V100R005C00)

5.91.05.30 (V100R005C01)

5.91.06.30 (V100R006C10) V200R014C60

5.91.07.10 (V100R007C00) V200R015C50

5.91.07.30 (V100R007C10) V200R015C60

OptiX PTN 960 5.94.03.40 (V100R003C03) Earlier than V100R009C00

5.94.05.10 (V100R005C00)

5.94.05.30 (V100R005C01)

5.94.06.30 (V100R006C10) V200R014C60

5.94.07.10 (V100R007C00) V200R015C50

5.94.07.30 (V100R007C10) V200R015C60

OptiX PTN 5.145.06.30 V200R014C60


906A (V100R006C10)

5.145.07.10 V200R015C50
(V100R007C00)

5.145.07.30 V200R015C60
(V100R007C10)

OptiX PTN 5.146.07.30 V200R015C60


906B (V100R007C10)

OptiX PTN 5.159.07.10 V200R015C50


906AI (V100R007C00)

5.159.07.30 V200R015C60
(V100R007C10)

OptiX PTN 5.123.05.30 Earlier than V100R009C00


905A (V100R005C01)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Categor Equipment Software Version First U2000 Version


y Supported

5.123.06.30 V200R014C60
(V100R006C10)

5.123.07.10 V200R015C50
(V100R007C00)

5.123.07.30 V200R015C60
(V100R007C10)

OptiX PTN 5.124.05.30 Earlier than V100R009C00


905B (V100R005C01)

5.124.06.30 V200R014C60
(V100R006C10)

5.124.07.10 V200R015C50
(V100R007C00)

5.124.07.30 V200R015C60
(V100R007C10)

OptiX PTN 990 8.150.07.20(V100R007C10 V200R015C60


)

8.150.08.10(V100R008C00 V200R016C50
)

PTN7900 PTN 7900-12 8.148.07.10(V100R007C00 V200R015C50


series )

8.148.07.20(V100R007C10 V200R015C60
)

8.148.08.10(V100R008C00 V200R016C50
)

PTN 7900-24 8.135.06.20(V100R006C10 V200R001C00


)

8.135.06.30(V100R006C20 V200R014C60
)

8.135.07.10(V100R007C00 V200R015C50
)

8.135.07.20(V100R007C10 V200R015C60
)

8.135.08.10(V100R008C00 V200R016C50
)

PTN 7900-32 8.128.06.10(V100R006C00 V200R001C00


)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Categor Equipment Software Version First U2000 Version


y Supported

8.128.06.20(V100R006C10 V200R001C00
)

8.128.06.30(V100R006C20 V200R014C60
)

8.128.07.10(V100R007C00 V200R015C50
)

8.128.07.20(V100R007C10 V200R015C60
)

8.128.08.10(V100R008C00 V200R016C50
)

NOTE

Mapping principle:
1. If the mapping table provides only the information that a.bb.cc.20 is supported by version A of the
U2000 LCT, a.bb.cc.2x is supported by version A of the U2000 LCT.
2. If the mapping table provides only the information that a.bb.cc is supported by version A of
theU2000 LCT, a.bb.cc.xx is supported by version A of the U2000 LCT.
Rules for defining commercial versions of NE software: a.bb.cc.dd. "a" indicates the NE platform
version. Currently, 4, 5 and 8 are supported. "bb" indicates the product name. "cc" indicates the R
version of the product. To be specific, 01 represents R001, 02 represents R002, and so on. "dd" indicates
the C version of the product.

Table 2-4 PTN 6900 equipment


Category Equipment Software First U2000 Version
Version Supported

PTN6900 series PTN 6900-1/PTN V600R003C02 Earlier than


6900-2/PTN V100R009C00
6900-3/PTN V600R005C00
6900-8/PTN V600R006C00
6900-16
V600R007C00

V600R008C00

V600R008C10

V600R008C20 V200R014C60

V600R009C00 V200R015C50

V600R009C10 V200R015C60

V600R009C20 V200R016C50

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Category Equipment Software First U2000 Version


Version Supported

PTN 6900-1- V800R005C01 Earlier than


M4/PTN 6900-2- V100R009C00
M8/PTN 6900-2- V800R006C00
M16 V800R006C10

V800R007C00 V200R014C60

V800R007C00 V200R014C60

V800R007C10 V200R015C50

V800R008C00 V200R015C60

V800R008C10 V200R016C50

PTN6900-3/8/16/3A V800R007C00 V200R014C60


/8A/16A
V800R007C10 V200R015C50

V800R008C00 V200R015C60

V800R008C10 V200R016C50

PTN6900-1/2/M2E/ V800R007C10 V200R015C50


M2F
V800R008C00 V200R015C60

V800R008C10 V200R016C50

PTN6900-2-M8A/ V800R008C10 V200R016C50


M16A

2.1.2.4 Submarine Line Equipment


The following table lists the submarine line equipment supported.

Table 2-5 Submarine line equipment

First NMS Version


Equipment Software Version
Supported

OptiX BWS 1600S 5.56.01.10 (V100R001) Earlier than V100R009C00

5.56.02.10 (V100R002)

5.56.03.10 (V100R003)

5.56.05.10-5.56.05.15
(V100R005C00)

5.56.05.16-5.56.05.19
(V100R005C01)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

First NMS Version


Equipment Software Version
Supported

5.56.06.10 (V100R006C00)

5.56.07.11 (V100R007C00) V200R014C50

OptiX BWS 1600S T16 5.51.08.10 (V100R006C00) V200R001C00

5.51.09.31 (V100R007C00) V200R014C50

5.51.11.10 (V100R008C00) V200R015C50

5.51.11.20 (V100R008C10) V200R015C60

SLM 1630 5.61.01.10 Earlier than V100R009C00

5.61.01.20 (V100R001C02)

5.61.02.10 (V100R002C00)

5.61.02.20 (V100R002C00)

5.61.03.10 (V100R003C00)

PFE 1670 5.72.01.17 (V100R001C01) V200R014C60

NOTE

Mapping principle:
1. If the mapping table provides only the information that a.bb.cc.20 is supported by version A of the
U2000 LCT, a.bb.cc.2x is supported by version A of the U2000 LCT.
2. If the mapping table provides only the information that a.bb.cc is supported by version A of
theU2000 LCT, a.bb.cc.xx is supported by version A of the U2000 LCT.
Rules for defining commercial versions of NE software: a.bb.cc.dd. "a" indicates the NE platform
version. Currently, 4, 5 and 8 are supported. "bb" indicates the product name. "cc" indicates the R
version of the product. To be specific, 01 represents R001, 02 represents R002, and so on. "dd" indicates
the C version of the product.

2.2 Features and Functions


This section describes the NE management features and functions provided by the U2000
LCT.

NOTE

If the U2000 has logged in to the NE that you are going to manage through the U2000 LCT, enable
LCT Access Control and select Serial Port Access Control or Ethernet Access Control on the
U2000.

2.2.1 Alarm Management


When an exception occurs on a network, the U2000 LCT needs to notify maintenance
engineers in a timely manner so that they can recover the network quickly.
Alarm management consists of the following functions:

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Network-wide alarm monitoring enable the U2000 LCT to notify maintenance engineers
of network exceptions in a timely manner so that the engineers can rectify faults quickly.
l Alarm association (with NEs, ports, or services), alarm masking, alarm suppression,
alarm reversion, maintenance experience base, improve the accuracy and efficiency of
alarm processing.
l Alarm synchronization ensures the reliability of alarms.
l Custom functions, such as alarm filtering, alarm redefinition, and time localization that
can meet the requirements of different scenarios.

Alarm Severity
Table 2-6 shows different alarm severities and the handling methods.

Table 2-6 Alarm severity


Alarm Severity Definition Handling Method

Critical A critical alarm indicates a Handle a critical alarm


fault or an event that may immediately to avoid a
seriously affect an NE or the system breakdown.
entire network, such as a
board failure or a clock
board failure.

Major A major alarm indicates a Handle a major alarm in a


fault or an event that may timely manner to avoid
affect part of a network, failure of important
such as a board failure or functions.
line failure.

Minor A minor alarm indicates a Such alarms are used to


general fault or an event remind the maintenance
affecting board or line engineer to efficiently locate
functions. the alarm causes and
eliminate the possible faults.

Warning A warning alarm indicates a Handle a warning alarm


fault or an event that does based on the operating status
not affect system of the network and NEs.
performance or services but
may potentially affect the
service quality of the NE or
resources. Some refers to
the prompt information
about the system when
equipment restores to
normal, for example, the
switching alarm.

l You can specify alarm sounds for different severities of alarms. If an alarm is generated,
the sound box on the computer where the client is installed produces corresponding
sound.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Different handling policies are provided for different severities of alarms. You can
redefine severities of specified alarms on the U2000 LCT based on needs by following
redefine alarm severities.
NOTE

Alarm severities need to be adjusted to suit the impact that the alarm has on services.

Alarm Status
l Alarm acknowledgment and alarm clear
Alarm acknowledgment: An acknowledged alarm indicates that the alarm has been
handled by a user. Alarm acknowledgment includes manual acknowledgment and
automatic acknowledgment.
NOTE

Manual acknowledgment: You can select an alarm from the current alarm window to
acknowledge it.
Automatic acknowledgment: If you enable the automatic alarm acknowledgment, the U2000
LCT acknowledges an alarm immediately after it is cleared or automatically acknowledges
the alarms that are cleared within the specified time (default setting is 1:00 am every day).
Alarm clear: An alarm can be cleared automatically or manually by the U2000 LCT
or through northbound interfaces (NBIs). After an alarm is cleared, the status of the
alarm is cleared.
l Alarm status classification
Based on the status of alarm acknowledgment and alarm clear, alarm status can be
classified into the following types:
Unacknowledged and uncleared
Acknowledged and uncleared
Unacknowledged and cleared
Acknowledged and cleared
NOTE

Acknowledged and cleared alarms become historical alarms after the user-preset period elapses.
All non-historical alarms are current alarms.
l Changing alarm status
Changing the clear status
When the condition triggering an alarm disappears, the NE or the U2000 LCT
server recovers. In this case, the NE or the U2000 LCT server reports a clear alarm.
The alarm status changes from uncleared to cleared. You can also manually clear an
alarm.
Changing the acknowledgment status
If an alarm is acknowledged, it indicates that the alarm will be handled or has been
handled. After the alarm is acknowledged, the alarm status changes from
unacknowledged to acknowledged.
You can unacknowledge an acknowledged alarm if necessary; doing so will switch
the alarm status back to unacknowledged.
l Relationships between alarm states
Figure 2-2 shows the relationships between alarm states and how an alarm changes from
one state to another.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Figure 2-2 Relationships between alarm states

Alarm Category
l Communication alarms: refer to the alarms related to NE communication, ECC
communication, and optical signal communication. For example, the interruption of NE
communication and the loss of optical signals.
l Process alarms: refer to the alarms related to the software processing and exception. For
example, equipment bus collision and the standby path check failure.
l Equipment alarms: refer to the alarms related to equipment hardware. For example, the
laser failure and the optical port loopback.
l Service alarms: refer to the alarms related to the service status and network QoS. For
example, the multiplex section performance threshold-crossings and the excessive B2 bit
errors.
l Environment alarms: refer to the alarms related to the power supply system and the
environment, such as temperature, humidity, and access control. For example, the
temperature of the power module exceeds the threshold.
l Security alarms: refer to the alarms related to the security of the U2000 and NEs. For
example, an NE user is not logged in.

Alarm Reporting and Handling Flowchart


Figure 2-3 shows the alarm reporting and handling flowchart of the U2000 LCT.

Figure 2-3 Alarm reporting and handling flowchart

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Network-Wide Alarm Monitoring


Traditionally, network maintenance was domain-based. Faults across domains needed to be
located manually, which lowered the efficiency. The U2000 LCT provides unified alarm
monitoring such as the network-wide alarm panel and alarm browsing, which helps users to
ascertain the operating status of the network in real time. It also provides alarm query
templates that are a collection of common query criteria. Users can create different alarm
query templates according to the region, type, and network layer of the device on which an
alarm is generated. The alarm query templates facilitate the query and monitoring of alarms.
There are three distinct alarm displays: alarm panel display, alarm bar chart, and alarm query
and browsing.

Table 2-7 Alarm display functions


Function Description

Alarm panel Figure 2-4 shows the alarm panel.


The alarm panel collects and displays statistics such as alarm
severity and quantity of managed objects. The alarm panel
provides a summary of system faults and can be used as a
monitoring panel.

Alarm bar chart Figure 2-5 shows the alarm bar chart.
The alarm bar chart shows alarm statistics in real time. The alarm
bar chart displays the alarm statistics collected by the alarm panel.

Querying and Browsing alarms includes browsing current alarms, browsing


viewing alarms historical alarms, browsing alarm logs, and browsing event logs. In
addition, alarm browsing provides multiple customized functions,
as shown in Figure 2-6 and Table 2-8.
l Viewing current alarms: Query the fault alarms that have not
been handled; that is, unacknowledged or uncleared alarms.
l Viewing historical alarms: Query the fault alarms that have
been handled; that is, acknowledged and cleared alarms.
l Viewing alarm logs: Query all fault alarms that are reported.
l Viewing event logs: Query all abnormal events that are
reported.
l Configuring an alarm query template: Save common filter
criteria as an alarm query template. Users can then use the
template to search for alarms based on the criteria set forth in
the template. This function helps users view and monitor
important alarms.
In the alarm browsing window, you can browse the following
information about an alarm: the severity, name, alarm source,
location information, frequency, first time of occurrence, last time
of occurrence, clear time, acknowledgment time, Fiber/Cable
Name, clear user, acknowledgment user, clear status,
acknowledgment status, location, direction, trail domain, alarm
reversion, protection subnet name, alarm plane, trail name, ASON
object name, and operation impact flag.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Figure 2-4 Alarm panel

Figure 2-5 Alarm bar chart

Alarm browsing consists of viewing current alarms, historical alarms, alarm logs, and event
logs; and has several customizable functions, as shown in Figure 2-6 and Table 2-8.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Figure 2-6 Viewing alarms


1 2 3 Alarm handling methods 4

10 9 8 7 6 5

Table 2-8 Alarm function


No. Function Description

1 Alarm display in color Alarms of different severities are


displayed in different colors in the
alarm list. The colors can be
customized.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

No. Function Description

2 Alarm viewing On the U2000 LCT, you can view


NE alarms and service alarms to
ascertain the operating status of the
NEs and networks, and view the
hierarchical alarms of NEs, boards,
interfaces, protocols and services.
Specifically, multiple windows for
browsing alarms can be opened on
one client.
l Viewing current alarms: View
current alarms of all severities on
the U2000 LCT.
l Viewing current alarms that are
severity-specific: You can
quickly ascertain the critical,
major, or minor alarms of the
entire network from the alarm
icons on the toolbar.
l Viewing the alarms of a specified
NE or U2000 LCT: You can
select an NE or a U2000 LCT in
the NE information list and
quickly ascertain the current
alarms of the selected object.
l Viewing historical alarms: By
viewing all historical alarms of
the U2000 LCT, you can
ascertain the faults that occurred
on the U2000 LCT and NEs. The
historical alarm data can be used
for long-term performance
analysis.

3 Alarm sort You can sort alarms by field and


Customized display customize the columns displayed in
the alarm list. Alarm data can be
saved to a file (.txt, .html, .xls, pdf,
or .csv) and can be printed.

4 Dynamic alarm panel On the U2000 LCT client, the alarm


panel sorts alarms by severity and
quantity. Current alarms are
indicated with a pop-up alarm panel
or flashing indicators. Double click
the alarm panel to display the
window for browsing alarms.

5 Alarm handling method Alarm masking:

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

No. Function Description

Alarm locating:
You can select a desired alarm, right-
click, and choose Locate in
Topology from the shortcut menu to
locate the alarm object in a topology
(choose Locate to NE Panel from
the shortcut menu for a physical
alarm).

Alarm Acknowledgment
Alarm acknowledgment enables you
to check whether alarms were
processed properly and that timely
follow-ups will be performed on
alarms that remain unprocessed.
Alarms can be acknowledged
manually or automatically.

Remote alarm notification:


You can select a desired alarm, right-
click, and choose Remote Alarm
Notification from the shortcut menu
to allow the U2000 to send alarm
information to maintenance
personnel through an email or text
message. This function enables
remote maintenance personnel to
know alarm and event information in
a timely manner and then take
appropriate measures.

Alarm saving/printing:
Query results can be saved and
printed.

6 Handling suggestion The handling suggestions provide


information, such as the alarm cause,
recovery suggestion, alarm
description, maintenance experience,
and cause type.
In the Handling Suggestion area, a
link to the corresponding alarm
reference topic in Online Help is
provided. You can click Click here
to show detail information to
display the corresponding alarm
reference topic in Online Help.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

No. Function Description

7 Details You can obtain the details of an


alarm, such as the alarm name and
identification information.

8 Alarm filtering Alarm filtering


When a large number of alarms
exist, you can filter alarms by alarm
name, alarm severity, status, type,
last occurrence time segment and
clear time segment. The alarm
filtering function improves the
efficiency of viewing alarms.
You can also customize filter
templates based on the attributes of
alarm sources, such as the objects of
NEs, object groups, and
maintenance areas. In this manner,
you can select the required alarm
filter template to filter alarms.

Alarm template
The alarm template can be
customized. Therefore, you can sort
and locate alarms quickly.

9 Scroll lock After this check box is selected,


alarms displayed in the alarm
browsing window remain
unchanged.

10 Show latest alarms After this check box is selected, the


most recently reported alarms are
automatically displayed in the
current alarm browsing window,
which helps obtain the latest alarm
information.

Alarm Statistics
You can quickly acquire alarm information by collecting and analyzing alarm statistics.

The U2000 LCT can sort alarms by the preset criteria. The criteria include the name, severity,
function type, generation time, alarm status, alarm source, or a combination of the preceding
items.

Alarm Masking
l By using the alarm masking function, you can set conditions to mask irrelevant alarms/
events to avoid redundant information.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l While an NE is being repaired, tested, or deployed, the NE may report a large number of
alarms which can be ignored. In this case, you need to mask these alarms so that the
U2000 LCT neither displays nor saves them.

Alarm Synchronization
After communication between the U2000 LCT and an NE recovers from an interruption, or
the U2000 LCT is restarted, some alarms on the NE are not reported to the U2000 LCT. The
NE alarms on the U2000 LCT are different from the actual alarms on the NE. In the case, you
need to synchronize alarms. Manual synchronization of alarms ensures that the U2000 LCT
displays the current operating status of the NE correctly.

In normal situations, after a device generates an alarm, the alarm is reported to the U2000
LCT within a short period (generally no longer than 10s) and displayed in the alarm list.

The U2000 LCT can synchronize NE alarms manually or automatically. You can set the
policy for automatic alarm synchronization. After you enable automatic alarm
synchronization, the U2000 LCT automatically synchronizes alarms to ensure alarm
consistency between the U2000 LCT and NEs after communication between the U2000 LCT
and NEs recovers or the U2000 LCT is restarted. Figure 2-7 illustrates the basic concept for
alarm synchronization.

Alarms are synchronized according to the following rules:

l If an alarm is cleared from an NE but remains uncleared on the U2000 LCT, the alarm
will be cleared from the U2000 LCT.
l If an alarm is present on an NE but absent from the U2000 LCT, the alarm will be added
to the U2000 LCT.

Figure 2-7 Alarm synchronization

Alarm Redefinition
The U2000 LCT allows you to redefine the alarm severity according to user requirements.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

NOTE

Only users in the Administrators group can redefine alarm or event names.

This function changes the alarm severity displayed on the U2000 LCT and highlights only the
important alarms as defined by user settings.

Alarm Suppression
The U2000 LCT supports the function of suppressing NE alarms. If you set the status of an
alarm to Suppressed, the NE does not report the alarm.
The difference between alarm suppression and alarm masking is as follows: If you enable
alarm masking, an NE still reports the masked alarm but the U2000 LCT does not receive the
alarm. If you enable alarm suppression, the NE does not report the suppressed alarm. For
details, see Figure 2-8.

Figure 2-8 Difference between alarm masking and alarm suppression

Alarm Reversion
During a new deployment, certain alarms that are reasonable but useless occur. For example,
when you configure a tributary board, line board, or Ethernet board for a service but they are
not connected with cables, a LOS alarm is generated. After the alarm reversion is set, the
alarm is not displayed. This does not affect the network monitoring task.
The alarm reversion has three modes: non-revertive, manual reversion and automatic
reversion. Table 2-9 shows how alarms are handled in the three modes.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Table 2-9 Alarm reversion handling mode


Reversion Processing Conditions Processing Results
Mode

This default mode indicates the None


normal alarm monitoring status.

When Reversion Mode is set to The U2000 LCT prompts a failure


Non-Revertive for the alarms of message when you attempt to
Non-revertive an NE. enable the alarm reversion for a
port. This is because the alarm
reversion of a port cannot be
enabled in the Non-Revertive
mode.

When Reversion Status of a port The status of the alarms reported


is set to Enabled: from the port immediately
changes to the opposite of the
actual alarms regardless of the
actual alarm status at the port.
That is, when there is an alarm at
Manual the port, the alarm is not reported.
reversion When there is no alarm at the
port, the alarm is reported.

When Reversion Status of a port The status of the alarms reported


is set to Disabled: from the port is consistent with
the actual alarm status regardless
of the actual alarm status at the
port.

When Reversion Status of a port l If there is no actual alarm at


is set to Enabled: the port, the setting fails.
l If an actual alarm exists at the
port, the setting successfully
takes effect as the port
becomes in the revertive
mode.
NOTE
When the alarm is cleared, the
alarm reversion at the port is
Automatic automatically stopped. In the
reversion automatic reversion mode, the
alarm reversion status of a port
automatically changes. This may
be different from the alarm
reversion status displayed on the
U2000 LCT.

When Reversion Status of a port The status of the alarms reported


is set to Disabled: from the port is consistent with
the actual alarm status regardless
of the actual alarm status at the
port.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Alarm Association
The U2000 LCT can locate alarms; that is, it can associate alarms with the topological object
(NE or NE panel) where the alarms are generated. This function improves fault locating
efficiency. Maintenance engineers can quickly locate alarm-affected services from specific
equipment alarms. Figure 2-9 shows the alarm association function.

Figure 2-9 Alarm association

Alarm Maintenance Experience Base


You can obtain information about how alarms were handled from the alarm maintenance
experience base. This base is a database that stores alarm details. For details, see Figure 2-10.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Alarm maintenance experience is summarized and recorded on the U2000 LCT by users
during maintenance. If a similar fault occurs, relevant alarm handling information is available
in the base for reference to achieve efficient alarm handling.

By using the function of importing alarm/event maintenance experience, you can import the
methods in which alarms were previously handled to the U2000 LCT.

By using the function of exporting alarm/event maintenance experience, you can export the
methods in which alarms were previously handled from the U2000 LCT to a file. These
practices make it easier to view alarm/event maintenance experience and the information can
be shared on other devices.

Figure 2-10 Alarm maintenance experience base

Alarm Time Localization


The NE that reports an alarm and the U2000 LCT may be in different time zones. For the
correct alarm generation time, the U2000 LCT automatically converts the alarm generation
time (expressed in the NE time) into the U2000 LCT local time.

The U2000 LCT displays the U2000 LCT local time when an alarm is generated,
acknowledged, or cleared. The U2000 LCT local time supports two modes: server time and
client time.

2.2.2 Performance Management


The performance of a network may deteriorate because of internal or external factors and
faults may occur. To achieve good network performance for live networks and future
networks while controlling costs, network planning and monitoring are necessary. In addition,
network efficiency needs to be measured in terms of the throughput rate, resource usage, and
error rate. The performance management function enables you to detect the deteriorating
tendency in advance and solve the potential threats so that faults can be prevented. In
addition, high-precision (106) performance measurement based on service packets is
implemented to collect performance indicators, including the packet loss rate, delay, and jitter.

Performance Monitoring Policy Settings


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l Customize the performance threshold template. Specifically, you can customize a


maximum of 16 performance threshold templates in addition to the default performance
threshold template.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Select the performance threshold template for an NE and set the performance thresholds.
l Customize the RMON performance attribute template.
l Set the performance thresholds for a specified board.
l Set the start and end time for monitoring NE performance.
l Set whether to prompt unavailable time (UAT) and threshold-crossing events in a timely
manner.
l Set the start and end time for monitoring Ethernet performance.
l Set the monitoring status of Ethernet performance events.
l Set the ATM performance monitoring time.
l Set the ATM performance monitoring period.
l Set the monitoring status of ATM performance events.
l Set the real-time ATM performance monitoring.
l Set performance thresholds based on ports or channels.

SDH Performance Monitoring


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l View the SDH current 15-minute and 24-hour performance data, historical 15-minute
and 24-hour performance data, UAT, and 15-minute and 24-hour threshold-crossing
events.
l Monitor the performance of ATM ports in real time, and view the historical performance
data of ATM ports.
l Monitor the performance of ATM VPs and VCs in real time, and view the historical
performance data of ATM VPs and VCs.
l Monitor the performance of Ethernet ports in real time, and view the historical
performance data of Ethernet ports.
l View the Ethernet performance data in charts or tables.
l Monitor the Ethernet RMON performance.
l Manage lower-order performance of boards.

WDM Performance Monitoring


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l View the WDM current 15-minute and 24-hour performance data, historical 15-minute
and 24-hour performance data, UAT, and 15-minute and 24-hour threshold-crossing
events.
l Monitor the performance of Ethernet ports in real time, and view the historical
performance data of Ethernet ports.
l View the Ethernet performance data in charts or tables.
l Monitor the Ethernet RMON performance.

RTN Performance Monitoring


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l View the RTN current 15-minute and 24-hour performance data, historical 15-minute
and 24-hour performance data, UAT, and 15-minute and 24-hour threshold-crossing
events.
l Monitor the performance of Ethernet ports in real time, and view the historical
performance data of Ethernet ports.
l View the Ethernet performance data in tables.
l Monitor the Ethernet RMON performance.

PTN Performance Monitoring


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l View the performance of a specified Ethernet service.
l View the performance of a specified pseudo wire (PW).
l View the performance of a specified ML PPP.
l View the performance of a specified tunnel.
l View the performance of a specified circuit emulation service (CES).
l View the performance of specified quality of service (QoS).
l View the performance of specified PW OAM.
l View the performance of specified MPLS OAM.
l View the performance of specified Ethernet OAM.
l View the performance of a specified ATM PWE3 service.
l View the performance of a specified layer 2 virtual private network (L2VPN) service.
l View the performance of a specified ATM IMA service.
l View the performance of a specified SDH-like service.
l View the performance of a specified regenerator section, multiplex section, and higher-
order path.
l View the performance of a specified lower-order path.
l View the performance of a specified E1.
l View the performance of a specified laser.
l View the performance of a specified management layer.
l Monitor the Ethernet RMON performance.
l Reset the performance register on a board.

Performance Data Analysis


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Analyze historical performance data.
l Forecast long-term performance and medium-term performance according to the
empirical formula that is created based on the historical performance data of the optical
transceiver.
If the performance data is available, the time for generating the performance and the
deviation range can be calculated.
If the time is available, the performance data at that time and the deviation range
can be calculated.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Performance Register Resetting


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Reset the board performance register.
l Reset the ATM performance register.
l Reset the Ethernet performance register.

TCA Threshold Setting


U2000 supports to set thresholds for performance, the U2000 uses TCA monitoring template
to configure the thresholds. TCA monitoring template is a collection of indicators with
specified thresholds. You can configure a TCA monitoring template for specified resources to
monitor the TCAs of the resources. The U2000 generates a TCA when the performance data
exceeds the defined threshold in the TCA monitoring template.

DB Size Calculator
The U2000 can predict the database size. Specifically, the U2000 calculates the required
database space based on the number of collection instances (number of interface resources),
collection period, life cycle and the number of indicators of each instance. In addition, the
U2000 can calculate the performance data life cycle based on the number of collection
instances (number of interface resources), collection period, number of indicators of each
instance and available database space.

2.2.3 Security Management


The security management function includes authentication, authorization, and access control,
to ensure that users can perform operations according to the authorities.

NE Security Management
l Manage NE users.
l Manage NE login.
l Lock NE login.
l Lock NE configuration.
l Set the LCT access control to determine whether the LCT is allowed to access an NE.
l Manage NE user groups.
l Query logged-in NE users and force an NE user to log out.
l Set security parameters for NEs.
l Manage NE security log that contains the operation records of logging in to the NE,
deleting an NE user and forcing a user to exit.
NOTE

The NE Explorer supports all the security functions of a single NE. Users can perform operations
related to a single NE using the NE Explorer. The Main Menu allows users to perform operations
on multiple NEs.
The detailed functions of NE security management in the NE Explorer depend on the type of NEs.
l Manage the LCD password. If you forget the LCD password, you can change it using the
U2000 LCT.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

NOTE

OptiX Metro 100 equipment supports the LCD control panel. You can use the control panel to set and
query parameters. Log in to the LCD control panel as an Admin or a Guest. Enter the password as
Admin.
You can use the U2000 LCTto set and change this password.
l Query all users of an NE.
l Configure the NE Syslog protocol.
l Perform NE security log auditing.
l Support NE basic ACL rule and advanced ACL rule.
l Support the Warning Screen function of displaying messages during NE login.

Network Security Management


l The security socket layer (SSL) protocol is supported in the communication between the
U2000 LCT and NEs.
l Support encrypting the user name and password that are used to log in to an NE.

System Security Management


l Support the timeout mechanism for a user login session.
l Set the timeout value.
l After a user is logged in, the system locks out the client screen if the user does not
perform any operations in a specified duration.
l The system locks out a user if the user fails the login for three consecutive times.
l If a user is locked out, the user can be automatically unlocked.
l Sensitive information such as the password cannot be displayed in plain text, stored, or
transferred in plain text.
l Display a legal statement during the user login process.
l Support the lockout function for the system monitoring client.

2.2.4 Communication Management


The communication management function provides a communication channel for operation,
administration and maintenance (OAM) of the transport network. You can configure a DCN
between the U2000 LCT and gateway NE, and a communication protocol between NEs.

NE Communication Parameter Settings


By using the U2000 LCT, a user can perform the following operations:

l Set the following NE communication parameters:


IP address
Extended ID of NE
Gateway IP address
Subnet mask of GNE
NSAP address
Connection mode

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Set extension embedded control channel (ECC) parameters of the Ethernet interface and
serial port.
l Manage ECC link: Query ECC link related to the NE.
l Access control
Enable the U2000 LCT to access NEs by using communication ports, such as the
OAM, COM, Ethernet ports, and serial ports.
Set the access rate for serial ports.
l Change DCC access rate by selecting the bytes used by DCC channel. Bytes used in
DCC communication can be set: three bytes (D1-D3), nine bytes (D4-D12) or twelve
bytes (D1-D12). The corresponding access rates are: 192 kbit/s, 576 kbit/s, and 768
kbit/s.
l Set transparent transmission of DCC: When networked with other vendor's equipment,
the OptiX series equipment can transparently transmit the D bytes of other vendor's
equipment through the D1-D3 bytes, and communicate with the OptiX equipment
through the D4-D12 bytes.
l DCC resources allocation: Query and set how D bytes are allocated and used.
l Inband DCN management: You can configure inband DCN to manage the equipment in a
network that contains only Ethernet services.
l Open systems interconnection (OSI) management: Contains parameter configuration of
the network layout and the route table.
l OSI tunnel management: You can configure OSI tunnels for those NEs at the edge of a
non-OSI network by OSI tunnel. In this way, the NMS for an OSI network is able to pass
through a non-OSI network to manage OSI NEs.
l IP stack protocol: Includes IP route management, OSPF parameter settings and proxy
ARP. The IP route management provides a table that stores the IP route relations
between the NE and other NEs in the network. You can query all the IP route
information in this table.
l Enable OSI link: Enable the OSI protocol at the Ethernet port of an NE so that the data in
accordance with the OSI protocol can pass through the NE. In this way an OSI link is
enabled.
l Support setting the communication mode of Ethernet interfaces on the NE.
l Support DCC transparent transmission through external clock interfaces.
l IP stack protocol: Includes IP route management, OSPF parameter settings and proxy
ARP. The IP route management provides a table that stores the IP route relations
between the NE and other NEs in the network. You can query all the IP route
information in this table.

DCN Protection Configuration


By using the U2000 LCT, you can perform the following operations:

l Set active and standby gateway NEs (GNEs) for an NE.


NOTE
A maximum of 3 GNEs can be set for an NE.
l Set the revertive mode.
l Set the types and addresses of the GNEs on the U2000 LCT.
l Test the communication states of NEs.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Query in DCN management the number of non-gateway NEs connected to each GNE.

Inband DCN Configuration


Inband DCN is a networking mode that uses service paths provided by the managed
equipment to manage the equipment in a network. In this mode, the U2000 LCT interaction
information is transmitted by using the service paths of the equipment. If you use the inband
DCN networking, dedicated DCN paths are not required and much cost of network
construction is saved.

The PTN equipment supports distinguishing service paths from U2000 LCT management
paths according to the MPLS tag or VLAN ID. The U2000 LCT supports configuring the
inband DCN functions as follows:
l Set the VLAN ID and bandwidth used by the inband DCN.
l Set the IP address and subnet mask of the board, to enable the U2000 LCT to access the
equipment through the service processing board.
l Set whether to enable inband DCN at a port.
l Set whether to enable inband DCN at a tunnel.

2.2.5 Report Management


The U2000 LCT provides reports on resources. You can print the data or save the data as a
file. The reports in tabular format can be filtered by equipment type and saved in XLS, TXT,
HTML, or CSV files.

Resource Report
l Board manufacturer information report
l Port statistics report
l Slot information report
l Statistics report of lower order cross-connections
l Report on WDM protection group switching status

2.2.6 Configuration Data Management


Besides basic NE configuration functions, configuration data management also includes the
backup and restoration of the NE configuration data. This ensures the data security and
reliability.

By using the U2000 LCT, a user can perform the following operations:

l Upload the configuration data of NE.


l Download the configuration data of NE.
l Copy configuration data of an NE to others.
l Automatically check the synchronization status between the U2000 LCT and NEs.
l Check whether the configuration data in U2000 LCT is consistent with that in NE.
l View the unsynchronized NE information.
l Synchronize NE data manually. In this way, the data in the U2000 LCT is consistent with
that in the NE.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Initialize configuration data in the U2000 LCT. The NE-layer data at the NM side is
cleared and the NE becomes unconfigured after the initialization.
l Back up NE data to the FDB0 and FDB1 databases in the SCC board.
l Back up the NE database manually or automatically to the CF card.
l Restore the NE database form the SCC board or the CF card.

2.2.7 MSTP NE Management


NE management consists of the attributes, communications, services, protections, and clock
configurations of each NE. The configuration data is stored in the database of the U2000 LCT
and the database of the corresponding NE.

Basic NE Configurations
The U2000 LCT supports the following operations:
l Modify NE attributes, including:
NE name
NE ID
Extended NE ID
Remarks
Preconfiguration attributes
NOTE

l NE IDs that need to be set using a DIP switch can be modified on the U2000 LCT.
l When the preconfiguration function is enabled for an NE, all configurations are performed
offline on the NE without affecting any services. These configurations will not be applied to
the NE but only saved in the U2000 LCT database. This function is mainly used for training,
or when the NE has not been physically installed.
l Synchronize NE time: Specify the interval or exact time to automatically align the time
of all NEs with the system time of the U2000 LCT server.
Set Auto-Synchronization parameters such as start time and period.
Set synchronous mode.
l Display boards in plug-and-play (PnP) mode: After being inserted into slots, boards
along with their information are automatically displayed in the NE Panel.
l Automatically disable NE functions: NE functions that affect services, such as loopback
and automatic laser shutdown (ALS), are disabled at the scheduled time.
l Set environmental monitoring-related parameters, including:
PMU interface
EMU interface
CAU interface
TCU interface
Temperature attributes
l Manage virtual NEs, including:
Creating virtual NEs.
Adding boards on virtual NEs.
Creating synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) services for virtual NEs.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Support the management of inband DCN.


l Graphically display performance events related to optical power.
l Create boards with adjustable bandwidths for preconfigured NEs.
l Support outdoor racks.
l Support auxiliary interfaces.

NE License Authorization
In the NE License Authorization window provided by the U2000 LCT, you can control the
basic functions, enhanced functions, and service access licenses of the TP Assistant, which
greatly increases device O&M efficiency.

OSPF Protocol Configuration


The open shortest path first (OSPF) protocol can be used as the network protocol for the
U2000 LCT.
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Manage the OSPF routing and set relevant parameters.
l Enable or disable port-level OSPF and link state advertisement (LSA).
l Import static routes.

Orderwire Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Set and query the orderwire phone numbers, call waiting time, and orderwire phone port
availability.
l Set and query network-wide conference call numbers.
l Set and query the length of subnet numbers and the related subnet of an optical interface.
l Set and query the SDH network node interface (NNI) orderwire phone numbers.
l Configure or query the F1 data port.
l Configure or query the broadcast data port.

Board Protection Configuration


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Configure board 1+1 protection.
l Configure 1:N tributary protection switching (TPS) protection for a tributary board.
l Configure board-level protection.
l Configure port protection.
l Configure 1+1 IF protection and 1+N IF protection.
l Query the data backup status between the active and standby SCC boards.

SDH Interface Configuration


The U2000 LCT supports the following operations:

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Query and configure SDH interface boards that are installed on NEs.
l Configure SDH interfaces.
l Configure circuit emulation service (CES) interfaces.
l Configure plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) interfaces.
l Modify the optical/electrical attributes of the port on a board.
l Configure overhead interfaces, including:
Orderwire phone number
Hotline number
Special line number
Conference call number
Subnet number length
F1 data port
Broadcast data port
Communication port
Data port
Out-ring route
l Configure the interface of an optical amplifier board.
l Manage the optical power of a board.
l Set tone and data access (TDA) interfaces, including:
TDA clock source
TDA power feeding
l Query and set overhead bytes, including:
Regenerator section overhead (J0)
Lower-order path overhead (V5, J2)
VC4 higher-order path overhead (J1, C2) and its pass-through or termination
VC3 higher-order path overhead (J1, C2)
l Support pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS).
l Support pre-alerts for port optical power.
l Set and query TUG structures in transmit and receive directions.
l Support lower-order loopback.
l Query the port status of line boards and data boards.
l Manage power consumption.
l Set and query the optical power threshold of line boards.
l Support automatic laser shutdown.
l Configuring Service Mapping for an SDH Port: The port mapping function enables the
U2000 LCT to mount traditional SDH and packet services on lower-order ODUk trails
dynamically and map virtual ports to physical ports.

SDH Service and Protection Configuration


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Configure VC12, VC3, VC4 or 3*AU3 services. For release 4.0 NEs (version
4.bb.cc.dd), selecting protection groups for these services is also supported.
l Manage Transmux services, including M13/E13 Transmux and M13/E13 Transmux
Server services.
l Configure VC4-4C, VC4-8C, VC4-16C, or VC4-64C concatenated services; bind or
unbind services, and select protection groups for them. For release 4.0 NEs (version
4.bb.cc.dd), selecting protection groups for these services is also supported.
l Configure other services, such as enterprise system connection (ESCON) services, 64
Kbit/s services (including TDA board services, Nx64 Kbit/s services), and DSL services.
l Manage subnetwork connection multiple protection (SNCMP) services.
l Activate or deactivate services.
l Manage subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) services.
l Manage subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP) services.
l Convert SNCP services to normal services or normal services to SNCP services.
l Configure multiple multiplex section protection (MSP) rings by VC4 at a single optical
port, which can increase the network resource usage.
l Configure REG. If REG is configured for a line board on the U2000 LCT, each pair of
optical ports (receiving port and transmitting port) of the line board provides more
functions than normal. With REG, SDH signals received by the receiving port are
directly passed through the regeneration section layer, amplified, and then sent to the
transmitting port. The whole process is completed on the board alone without any help
from the SCC board or a cross-connect board.
l Query the capacity of higher order and lower-order cross-connections of an NE.

ATM Interface, Service, and Protection Configuration


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l Manage ATM interface boards, including:


Querying ATM interface boards on NEs
Configuring ATM interface boards for NEs
l Query bandwidth of ATM boards.
l Set parameters of ATM interfaces.
l Configure ATM traffic.
l Configure ATM cross-connections, including:
Creating an SDH NNI on the ATM processing board
Configuring ATM cross-connections
Configuring ATM protection groups
Configuring ATM protection pairs
Configuring the same services for SDH boards as those on ATM boards
Activating or deactivating ATM cross-connections
l Configure ATM path binding.
l Perform ATM operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM), including:
Setting and querying the segment end attributes of a connection point.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Setting and querying the activation status of continuity check (CC) at a connection
point.
Performing a remote loopback test.
Setting and querying the loopback location identifier (LLID) of an NE.
Uploading, downloading, or copying the NE OAM data or performing a consistency
check on the data.
l Configure an inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA) group.

Ethernet Interface and Service Configuration


The U2000 LCT supports the following operations:
l Query and configure Ethernet interface boards on NEs.
l Configure Ethernet transparent transmission boards that transmit high-rate services.
l Configure Ethernet internal interfaces, including:
Basic attributes
Tag attributes
Network attributes
Encapsulation and mapping
Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
Bound path
Advanced attributes
l Configure Ethernet external interfaces, including:
Basic attributes
Traffic control
Tag attributes
Network attributes
Advanced attributes
l Configure point-to-point link-state pass through (LPT) or point-to-multipoint LPT.
l Configure or create E-Line services (including Ethernet private line (EPL) services and
Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) services) and configure the bound paths.
l Configure Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services: You can create a virtual bridge (VB)
and set the following parameters:
Service mounting
VLAN filtering table
VLAN unicast
MAC address disabling
Bound paths
Self-learning MAC address
MAC address table capacity of the VB port
MAC address table capacity of the VLAN
l Configure Ethernet Layer 2 switching, including:
Aging time

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Spanning Tree Protocol


Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
IGMP Snooping Configuration
l Configure QinQ services: QinQ is a VLAN stacking technology that marks users with
stacked VLAN tags to expand VLAN resources. You can add, strip, or exchange VLAN
tags depending on the scenario.
l Configure Ethernet link aggregation groups (LAGs) that can be divided into intra-board
LAGs and inter-board LAGs, including:
Creating and deleting a LAG.
Adding and deleting ports to a LAG.
Querying ports in a LAG and the aggregation status.
l Configure the quality of service (QoS), including:
Flow
Committed access rate (CAR)
Class of service (CoS)
Flow shaping
Port shaping
Port policy of the differentiated service (DiffServ) domain
CAR policy
Weighted random early detection (WRED) policy of ports
V-UNI ingress policy
V-UNI egress policy
PW policy
WRED congestion and discarding policy of services
QinQ policy
Weighted fair queuing (WFQ) scheduling policy
WRR scheduling policy
CoS mapping
l Check frame receiving and transmitting on Ethernet boards.
l Query information about the peer NE of a data service.
l Provide a QoS template to simplify the QoS configuration for Ethernet services on a per-
NE basis.
l Automatically report RMON performance events on Ethernet boards.
l Dump historical RMON performance events on Ethernet boards.
l Perform protocol diagnoses.
l Enable alarms in the event of no traffic at Ethernet ports.
l Configure Ethernet port mirroring and flow mirroring. In this manner, the product does
not resolve or process the captured data.
l Set and query the MAC address of a data board.
l Collect traffic statistics for a port.
l Monitor Ethernet port traffic and generate reports.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Enable the board to respond to ping commands.


l Create flows in batches.
l Manage multi-protocol label switching Label Switching (MPLS) tunnels. The MSTP
equipment sets up a label switched path (LSP) to a PE router, identifies LSP labels and
service priorities, and encapsulates LSPs into virtual concatenation groups (VCGs) for
transmission.
l Configure the control plane, including static routes and address resolution.
l Manage VPLS services.

Ethernet OAM
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT for configuring the 802.1ag
Ethernet OAM:
l Create and configure maintenance nodes.
l Perform a CC check.
l Perform a loopback (LB) check.
l Perform a link trace (LT) check.
l Perform performance detection.
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT for configuring the 802.3ah
Ethernet OAM:
l Enable OAM automatic discovery.
l Query the peer OAM parameters.
l Notify link events.
l Set link monitoring parameters for detecting frame error events, frame error periods, and
frame error seconds.
l Implement remote loopback.
l Implement the reporting of Ethernet OAM loopback events.

Clock Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Configuration of physical clocks
Query the clock synchronization status.
Set clock source priority, including:
n Priority table for system clock sources
n Priority table for phase-locked sources of the first external clock output
n Priority table for phase-locked sources of the second external clock output
Set clock source switching, including:
n Clock source restoration parameters
n Clock source switching conditions
n Performing clock source switching
Configure clock subnets, including:
n Clock subnet

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

n Clock quality
n Synchronization status message (SSM) output control
n Enable status of clock IDs
Set phase-locked sources of external clock output, including:
n Phase-locked sources of external clock output
n Attributes of 2M phase-locked sources of external clocks
l Configuration of IEEE 1588 clocks
Set the selection mode of frequency sources.
Set the PTP clock source.
Set the quality level of PTP clock sources.
Set the priority table of PTP clock sources.
Configure a PTP clock service.
Configure the clock interface.
Set the external clock interface output.
l Configuration of CES ACR clocks
The CES adaptive clock recover (ACR) function, based on CES services, uses the
adaptive mode to recover the source clock at the sink. Specifically, the sink equipment
can recover the TDM clock (in FIFO mode) according to changes in the buffer for CES
services (the buffer changes when receiving packets from the network side). In this
manner, clock synchronization can be maintained for services at the sink.
l Unified configuration of clock domains

Configuration of Hybrid MSTP Service Interfaces


You can configure the general, Layer 2, or Layer 3 attributes for an interface to specify the
working mode and application scenario of the interface.

General attributes are physical attributes of the interface. Layer 2 attributes are data link layer
attributes of the interface, such as ATM attribute, VLAN attribute, and QinQ attribute. Layer
3 attributes are network layer attributes of the interface, such as the IP attribute.

Table 2-10 lists the Hybrid MSTP service interface types that the U2000 LCT supports.

Table 2-10 Types of Hybrid MSTP service interfaces

Service Interface Supported Port Port Type Function


Mode/
Encapsulation
Type

SDH interface General attributes Physical port To set general


attributes for an SDH
interface.

Advanced attributes Physical port To set advanced


attributes for an SDH
interface.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Service Interface Supported Port Port Type Function


Mode/
Encapsulation
Type

PDH interface General attributes Physical port To set general


attributes for a PDH
interface. The PDH
interface configured
with general
attributes can be
used to carry TDM
services.

Layer 3 attributes Physical port To make a PPP-


enabled PDH
interface act as a
member in a
Multilink PPP (MP)
group after Layer 3
attributes have been
set for the interface.

Advanced attributes Physical port To set advanced


attributes for a PDH
interface.

Ethernet interface General attributes Physical port To set general


attributes for an
Ethernet interface.

Layer 2 attributes Physical port To set Layer 2


attributes for an
Ethernet interface.
The Ethernet
interface configured
with Layer 2
attributes can be
used to carry user-
side or network-side
Ethernet services.

Layer 3 attributes Physical port To set Layer 3


attributes for an
Ethernet interface.
The Ethernet
interface configured
with Layer 3
attributes can be
used to carry tunnels.

Advanced attributes Physical port To set advanced


attributes for an
Ethernet interface.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Service Interface Supported Port Port Type Function


Mode/
Encapsulation
Type

Flow Control Physical port Indicates the flow


control method used
by an Ethernet
interface in Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
or Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode.
Autonegotiation
enables information
exchange between
two connected NEs,
fully exerting their
capabilities.

Serial interface General attributes N/A To set general


attributes for a serial
interface.

Layer 3 attributes Logical port To make a PPP-


enabled serial
interface act as a
member in an MP
group after Layer 3
attributes have been
set for the interface.

Synchronization Protocol Configuration


In the application scenario of dual-homing, the status of the peer equipment needs to be
obtained for the MC LAG. Meanwhile, the actions on both sides need to be negotiated based
on different fault cases. With the method of adding information of the peer end, a channel is
established for control status synchronization with the peer end. In this manner, the control
packets can be transmitted and received through the channel and link fault detection can be
performed.

LAG/MC LAG Configuration


A LAG aggregates multiple Ethernet physical links to form a logical link of faster rate for
transmitting data. This function improves the link availability and increases link capacity.

The MC LAG supports the ability to share load between aggregation group equipment.

The U2000 LCT supports the ability to set the following LAG/MC LAG attributes:

l Load sharing type, including sharing and non-sharing

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l LAG type, including manual and static


l Load sharing hash algorithm of the LAG
l Port priority and system priority of the LAG

LMSP Configuration
Linear MSP protection contains 1+1 linear MSP and 1:N linear MSP. They use the protection
channel to protect services that are transmitted on the working channel. When the working
channel fails, services are switched to the protection channel. The linear MSP applies to the
POS interface and structured STM interface.
The U2000 LCT supports the following functions of LMSP configuration:
l Creates a linear MSP.
l Checks the linear MSP switching status.
l Performs linear MSP switching.

MSTP Configuration
The multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) can be used to clear loops on a network. Using
an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant trails so that the loop network can be trimmed as a
non-loop tree network. In this case, broadcast storms caused by the proliferation and endless
cycling of packets on the loop network do not occur. Different from the STP and RSTP that
use only one spanning tree to correspond to all VLANs, the MSTP introduces the mapping
between VLANs and multiple spanning trees, and therefore can forward data according to
VLAN packets and achieve load balance of VLAN data.
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Configure parameters of port groups and network bridges.
l Configure CIST and MSTI parameters.
l Query CIST status and MSTI status.

IGMP Snooping Configuration


The Internet group management protocol snooping (IGMP snooping) is a scheme of multicast
constraints on Layer 2 equipment, and is used to manage and control multicast groups.
The U2000 LCT supports the configuration of IGMP snooping for E-LAN services, and
provides the following operations:
l Configure IGMP Snooping protocol parameters.
l Configure quick leaving ports.
l Manage routes.
l Configure route member ports.
l Query statistics of IGMP protocol packets.

LPT Configuration
LPT is used to return the remote-end link status to the near end. The near-end equipment
performs operations depending on the remote-end link status. When the intermediate
transmission network of the services becomes faulty, the LPT informs the access equipment at

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

both ends of the transmission network to enable the backup network. This ensures the normal
transmission of the important data.

The Hybrid MSTP NEs support configuring point-to-point LPT and point-to-multipoint LPT.

QoS Configuration
QoS indicates the performance of the data flow that travels through a network. The QoS is
used to ensure end-to-end service quality. The QoS cannot increase the bandwidth, but it can
minimize the delay and jitter in the network by appropriately allocating and monitoring
network resources. In this way, the quality of important services is ensured.

The DiffServ (DS) domain consists of a group of network nodes that enable the DiffServ
function, that is, DS nodes. In a DS domain, all DS nodes use the same service provision
policy to realize the same per-hop behavior (PHB). The DS nodes are classified into edge DS
nodes and internal DS nodes. The edge DS nodes usually perform complex flow classification
on the traffic that enters the DS domain. Traffic of different types is marked with different
PHB service types. For internal DS nodes, you need to perform only simple flow
classification based on PHB service type.

The U2000 LCT supports the following QoS functions:

l Configures QoS profiles.


l Configures DiffServ domains.
l Configures ATM CoS mapping.
l Configures simple flow classification and complex flow classification.
l Configures CAR and Shaping.
l Configures the WFQ scheduling policy.
l Configures the port WRED policy.
l Configures the service WRED policy.
l Configures WRR scheduling policy.
l To simplify the operation and share some common QoS configuration parameters, the
U2000 LCT supports creating QoS function point policies as follows: port policy, ATM
policy, V-UNI ingress policy, V-UNI egress policy, PW policy and QinQ policy. By
using these function point policies, you can bind the CAR configuration attribute,
shaping configuration attribute, flow classification configuration attributes, WFQ
Schedule policy, WRED policy and WRR scheduling policy.
l Configure CoS queue mapping.
l Supports the application of the QoS policy to multiple NEs by configuring QoS profile.

MPLS Tunnel Configuration


MPLS is a type of transmission technology used to transparently transmit data packets
between users. The MPLS tunnel is the tunnel defined in the MPLS protocol. Independent
from the service, the MPLS tunnel realizes end-to-end transmission and carries the PWs
related to the service.

The U2000 LCT supports configuring the following functions of the MPLS tunnel on a per-
NE basis:

l Configures general attributes of the MPLS.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Configures static unicast MPLS tunnels.


l Creates forward and backward MPLS tunnels at the same time.
l Creates static and bidirectional MPLS tunnels.
l Manages PWs.
l Manages tunnel labels and PW labels.

Configuration of the MPLS Tunnel Protection Group


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l Create and configure an MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection group and MPLS tunnel 1:1
protection group, including the switching mode, revertive mode, WTR time, and hold-off
time.
l Perform MPLS tunnel protection switching.
l Query the switching status of MPLS tunnel protection.

MS-PW Configuration
By creating multi-segment pseudo wires (MS-PWs) to transmit services, you can transmit
services over different networks while saving tunnel resources.

PW APS Configuration
As a network protection mechanism, PW automatic protection switching (APS) is intended to
protect the services on the working PW with a protection PW. That is, when the working PW
is faulty, the services on the working PW are switched to the protection PW. In this manner,
the services on the working PW are protected.

You can perform the following PW APS operations on a per-NE basis:


l Create a protection group.
l Bind the master and slave protection pairs.

CES Configuration
CES configuration is mainly used for transparent transmission of TDM circuit switching data
on the PSN network.

You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l Create PWs for a CES service.


l Create UNI-UNI and UNI-NNI CES services.
l Create CES services with the following two modes:
Structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network
(CESoPSN)
Structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP)
l Configure QoS for CES services.
l Configure transparent transmission for CES service alarms.
l Create CES services using either of the following transparent transmission modes:
common or SOH.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Change the tunnel where PWs are carried in in-service mode.

ATM Service Configuration


ATM emulation service is mainly used to transparently transmit ATM services in the PTN.
The U2000 LCT provides the following configuration functions for ATM service creation:
l Create an ATM service with multiple ATM connections.
l Creates UNI-UNI and UNIs-NNI ATM services.
l Create ATM services using one of the following connection types: PVP, PVC, or port
transparent.
l Creates PWs for an ATM service.
l Configures IMA groups.
l Configures QoS for ATM services.
l Configures CoS mapping.
l Selects the tunnel that carries PWs without interrupting services.

E-Line Service Configuration


The E-line service is a point-to-point Ethernet service. The equipment transmits user packets
from the user side to the network side based on Port or Port+VLAN. In this way, service data
can be transparently transmitted in a point-to-point manner.
See Figure 2-11. Company A has branches in City 1 and City 3. Company C has branches in
City 1 and City 2. Branches of Company A or Company C that are in different cities have data
communication requirements. The Hybrid MSTP equipment can provide E-line services for
Company A and Company C, to meet their communication requirements. In addition, the
service data can be completely isolated.

Figure 2-11 E-Line Service

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

The U2000 LCT supports the following functions of configuring E-line services on a per-NE
basis:
l Creates UNI-UNI E-Line services.
l Creates UNI-NNI E-Line services that are carried on ports.
l Creates UNI-NNI E-Line services that are carried on PWs.
l Creates UNI-NNI E-Line services that are carried on QinQ links.
l Configures QoS for the PWs of an E-Line service.
l Configures V-UNI groups.
l Selects the tunnel that carries PWs without interrupting services.

E-AGGR Service Configuration


E-AGGR services are multipoint-to-point Ethernet services. The equipment uses several ports
to access services from the V-UNI side, and converges the services into one PW at the
network side for transmission. In this way, service data from multiple points can be converged
into one point.
See Figure 2-12 and Figure 2-13. One carrier wants to construct a 3G network. Services of
each Node B are converged and transported to the RNC. The data between each Node B and
RNC is regarded as one service. At the convergence point, the QoS parameters such as the
overall bandwidth are specified.

Figure 2-12 E-AGGR service scenario 1

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Figure 2-13 E-AGGR service scenario 2

The U2000 LCT supports the following functions of configuring E-AGGR services on a per-
NE basis:
l Configures the VLAN forwarding table items of an E-AGGR service.
l Configures QoS for the PWs for an E-AGGR service.
l Configures V-UNI groups.
l Selects the tunnel that carries PWs without interrupting services.

E-LAN Service Configuration


The E-LAN is a multipoint-to-multipoint Ethernet service. It connects to multiple V-UNI and
NNI access points. It realizes packet forwarding and interconnection by using the MAC
address self-learning scheme of layer 2.
See Figure 2-14. The HQ of Company A is in City 3. Company A has Branch A in City 1,
City 2, and City 3, and has Branch B in City 1 and City 2. Branch A and Branch B do not
have business with each other. The data should be isolated between the two branches. The HQ
has requirements of communicating with each branch and accessing the Internet.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Figure 2-14 E-LAN service

Different VLANs are used to identify service data of different branches by using the E-LAN
service. In this way, data is shared within a branch and is isolated from other branches. The
Internet data of the HQ is also isolated from the internal service data by using the VLAN.
The U2000 LCT supports the following functions of configuring E-LAN services on a per-NE
basis:
l Creates E-LAN services that are carried on port.
l Creates E-LAN services that are carried on QinQ links.
l Creates E-LAN services that are carried on PW.
l Configures QoS for the PWs for an E-LAN service.
l Configures V-UNI and NNI interfaces for an E-LAN service.
l Configures the split horizon group of an E-LAN service.
l Configures V-UNI groups.
l Configures MAC address learning parameters.
l Configures the unknown frame processing mode.
l Configures the static MAC address.
l Configures the disabled MAC address.
l Configures the self-learning MAC address.

MPLS OAM Configuration


MPLS OAM refers to a group of OAM functions that can check the quality of LSPs in an
MPLS network. The MPLS OAM scheme can effectively detect, report, and handle a defect

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

inside the network at the MPLS layer in addition to triggering protection switching when a
malfunction occurs.

The U2000 LCT provides the following functions of configuring MPLS OAM:

l Configures MPLS OAM parameters of a tunnel.


l Performs tunnel CV/FFD check.
l Performs tunnel ping check.
l Performs tunnel traceroute check.
l Performs PW ping check.
l Performs PW traceroute check.
l Enables or disables the FDI.

ATM OAM Configuration


ATM OAM refers to a group of end-to-end OAM functions that can check the quality of ATM
links that pass through multiple NEs. The ATM OAM functions check an ATM link by
inserting some OAM cells of the standard cell structure to the user cell flow.

The U2000 LCT provides the following functions of configuring ATM OAM:

l Sets segment end attributes.


l Performs a CC activation test.
l Performs remote loopback.
l Sets LLID.
l Configures ATM alarm transmission

MPLS-TP OAM Configuration


Complying with MPLS-TP standards, MPLS-TP OAM provides the following OAM
functions for MPLS-TP networks:

l Checking, discovering, and locating a defect inside the network at the MPLS layer.
l Reporting and handling the defect.
l Triggering protection switching when a fault occurs.

This feature provides the following functions:

l Setting MEP parameters.


l Performing a CC check.
l Performing ping tests.
l Performing traceroute tests.
l Performing LB tests.
l Performing LT tests.
l Checking packet loss ratios and delay.
l Performing LCK and TST tests.
l Setting MIP parameters.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

MPLS OAM Switching


This feature provides the following functions:

l Switching OAM recommendations.


l Switching to the OAM dual-stack mode.

Setting SNMP NMS Parameters


When the OSS obtains alarm and performance data from NE over SNMP, you need to
configure IP address and permission control parameters of OSS on the U2000 LCT.

Query the Core Routing Table


To quickly check whether the communication between the created NE and the gateway NE is
normal during deployment in the scenario where hybrid MSTP NEs use in-band DCN
protocol for communication.

Setting PCM Interfaces


The SDH equipment on a transport network integrates some pulse code modulation (PCM)
interfaces, including FXO and FXS ports and 2-wire/4-wire AF EM interfaces. The main
service scenarios are as follows:
l Z interface extension service: FXO and FXS ports work in pairs to implement
transparent telephone transmission. Common telephones can connect directly to a private
branch exchange (PBX) which extends to NEs with the FXO and FXS ports. Each
telephone port occupies a 64 kbit/s E1 channel.
l Hotline service: FXO and FXS ports work in pairs to implement E-Line telephone
services. It mainly completes the end-to-end voice communication between stations.
Users can communicate with each other by just picking up the phone, that is, no dialing
is required.
l 2-wire/4-wire AF EM regeneration: The PBXs are connected to transport NEs through
the 2-wire/4-wire + EM interfaces. The EM interfaces transmit signaling and the 2-
wire/4-wire ports transmit voice data. The transport NEs act as the regenerators of
signaling and voice data.
l End-to-end control signal transmission: EM ports are used independently to transmit
connection and disconnection signals through only one channel. In this manner, switch
signals are transmitted remotely to implement remote control.

MPLS Ring Protection Management


This feature adds an independent ring layer, which does not affect services. The MPLS ring
protection, similar to SDH ring protection, provides reliable protection capabilities to
withstand multi-node failures. This feature provides the following functions:

l To discover MPLS rings automatically.


l To view the topology of MPLS rings.
l To refresh and query the protection switching status of MPLS rings.
l To create MPLS protection ring protection.
l To manage MPLS ring protection.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l To delete MPLS ring protection.


l To bind a tunnel to or unbind a tunnel from a protected MPLS ring.
l To unbind multiple tunnels from a protected MPLS ring at a time.
l To diagnose faults on protected MPLS rings.
l To display alarms for protected MPLS rings.
l To configure or delete the intersecting nodes of protected MPLS rings.

Maintaining and Troubleshooting


l IP Ping: In mobile backhaul scenarios, to diagnose a fault, engineers usually must find
out on which network the fault occurred. IP ping enable you to preliminarily locate the
fault on the transport or wireless network.
l Data Service Performance Test: E-Line service indicators such as the throughput and
latency can be tested on the U2000 LCT to avoid costly and inefficient meter tests.

2.2.8 SDH ASON Network Management


An automatically switched optical network (ASON) is a new-generation optical network that
integrates switching and transport functions. After a user initiates a service request, the ASON
network automatically selects a route. The network then dynamically establishes and removes
connections through signaling control. An SDH ASON NE refers to the equipment that has
both SDH and ASON features. The U2000 LCT combines ASON and SDH features to
perform SDH ASON network management.

SDH ASON Management on a Per-NE Basis


l Manage the ASON features of an NE.
l Manage auxiliary ASON function.
l Manage node ID of an ASON NE.
l Manage the ASON features of boards.
l Manage the control plane status of an NE.
l Manage control plane parameters, including the bandwidth usage (%), bandwidth
weight, distance weight, hop weight, and custom cost weight. The route selection policy
is supported.
l Manage control channels.
l Query LMP component links.
l Query LMP TE links.
l Set the LMP auto discovery mode.
l Manage fiber resource thresholds.
l Query OSPF control links.
l Query OSPF SDH TE links.
l Query OSPF component links.
l Manage OSPF IP addresses.
l Manage OSPF TE link flood thresholds.
l Manage OSPF protocol authentication.
l Manage ASON trail groups.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Query ASON trails.


l Maintain SDH ASON signaling.
l Maintain SDH ASON switch controllers.
l Maintain ASON shared mesh switch controllers.
l Manage the auto-reporting status of control plane alarms.
l Manage the severities and suppression status of control plane alarms.
l Manage control plane performance parameters.
l Query control plane performance.
l Manage resource reservation.
l Manage the usage status of VC4 timeslots.
l Manage the virtual interfaces of ASON links.
l Manage the inactive PPPoE interfaces.

2.2.9 WDM/OTN NE Management


Network element (NE) management consists of attributes, communications, services,
protections, and clock configurations of each NE. The configuration data is stored in the
database of the U2000 LCT and the database of the corresponding NE.

Basic NE Configurations
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Synchronize NE time: Specify the interval or exact time to automatically align the time
of all NEs with the system time of the U2000 LCT server, NTP server, or standard NTP
server.
l Query physical inventories, including:
Telecommunications rooms
NEs
Rack
Boards
Ports
Optical module
Occupied slot statistics
Slot usage status
l Display boards in plug-and-play (PnP) mode: After being inserted into slots, boards
along with their information are automatically displayed in the NE Panel.
l Implement automatic disabling of NE functions: NE functions that affect services, such
as loopback, automatic laser shutdown (ALS), and intelligent power adjustment (IPA),
are disabled at the schedule time.
l Modify the following NE attributes:
NE name
NE ID
NE extended ID
Remarks

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Preconfiguration attributes
NOTE

Long-distance and WDM Metro NEs can be pre-configured. For pre-configured NEs, all configurations
on the U2000 LCT are performed in off-line mode. Such configurations bring no impact on services.
The configuration data is stored in the database of the U2000 LCT only, not applied to the NEs. The
preconfiguration attribute is generally used either in training or when the involved NEs are not in place.
l Set the PMU interface and NE fan speed and monitor the temperature and voltage.
l Search for and create NEs by automatically discovering NE IP addresses.
l When a faulty board is replaced, related indicators on the U2000 LCT will blink.
l View board legends and the meanings of different colors in the NE panel.
l Create the virtual WDM NE to simulate the network NE during the network planning.

Orderwire Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l Set a board as an orderwire board and query the orderwire board information.
l Set and query the orderwire phone numbers, call waiting time, dialing mode, and
orderwire phone port availability.
l Set and query network-wide conference call numbers.
l Set and query the length of subnet numbers and the related subnet of an optical interface.
l Set and query the NNI orderwire phone numbers.
l Set and query the F1 data port.
l Set and query the broadcast data port.
l Set E1 cross-connections.

Optical Layer Configuration


l Schedule and manage wavelengths based on ITU-T recommendations.
l Schedule and manage wavelengths based on Flex Grid.
l Configure automatic commissioning at the optical layer for OptiX OSN 1800: The
commissioning aims to establish data communication network (DCN) communication
between the U2000 LCT and OptiX OSN 1800s, discover the adjacent nodes of each
OptiX OSN 1800, and maintain high optical performance of main optical routes.

WDM Board Configuration


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l Configure optical transponder units.


l Configure optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards.
l Configure optical amplifier boards.
l Configure protection boards.
l Configure spectrum analysis boards.
l Configure optical supervisory channel boards.
l Configure optical add/drop multiplexer boards.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Configure variable optical attenuation boards.


l Configure automatic optical fiber monitoring boards.
l Configure optical equalization boards.
l Configure dispersion compensation boards.
l Configure wavelength management boards.

Overhead Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

Configure OTN overheads.


l Configure and query section monitoring (SM) overheads.
l Configure and query optical transmission section (OTS) overheads.
l Configure and query path monitoring (PM) overheads.
l Configure and query tandem connection monitoring (TCM) overheads.
l Query optical channel payload unit (OPU) overheads.
l Configure and query fault type and fault location reporting channel (FTFL) overheads.
l Configure and query mulitframe structure identifier (MSI) overheads.
l Configure and query reserved for future international standardisation (RES) overheads.

Configure WDM overheads.


l Configure optical channel (OCh) overheads at SDH interfaces.
l Configure optical transponder unit (OTU) overheads at OTN interfaces.
l Configure optical demultiplexer unit (ODU) overheads at OTN interfaces.
l Query OPU overheads at OTN interfaces.
l Configure OTS overheads at OTN interfaces.

Ethernet Interface and Service Configuration


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l Configure internal Ethernet interfaces, including:


Basic attributes
Traffic control
Tag attributes
Network attributes
Bound paths
Advanced attributes
LCAS
l Configure external Ethernet interfaces, including:
Basic attributes
Flow control
Tag attributes
Network attributes

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Advanced attributes
l Configure E-Line services, such as Ethernet private line (EPL) services, Ethernet virtual
private line (EVPL) services (QinQ), and VLAN subnet connection protection (SNCP)
services.
NOTE

l QinQ is a VLAN stacking technology that mark users with stacked VLAN tags to expand VLAN
resources. Currently, the U2000 LCT can add, split, and exchange VLAN tags.
l A VLAN SNCP service is a VLAN-based E-Line service that is configured with SNCP protection.
You can create VLAN SNCP and QinQ VLAN SNCP services, and perform conversion between
VLAN SNCP services and common Ethernet services.
l Set the quality of service (QoS), including:
Flow
Committed access rate (CAR)
Class of service (CoS)
Flow shaping
Port shaping
l Implement the intra-board LAG function.
l Test frame receiving and transmitting on Ethernet boards.
l Automatically report RMON performance events on Ethernet boards.
l Dump historical RMON performance data of Ethernet boards.

WDM Service Configuration


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
Configure ADM for GE/FC services at an optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) station by
using the OTU board.
l Configure several WDM service boards in specified slots to form a cross-connect board
group.
l Enable the add/drop, pass-through, and loopback functions for GE/FC services in each
cross-connect board group.
l Configure wavelength cross-connection protection (WXCP) with working and protection
cross-connections configured on the sink NE.
Configure electrical cross-connections. Configure electrical cross-connections to control
service flow at the electrical layer, and to dynamically groom, converge, or split sub-
wavelength services. In this manner, the networking capability and network survivability are
greatly enhanced.
Configure optical cross-connections.
l Dynamically create optical cross-connections.
l Manage optical cross-connections on boards and NEs including creating, activating,
deactivating, deleting and querying such boards and NEs.
l Create, query, or delete edge ports.
l Configure NE-level optical broadcast services.
Implement transparent transmission for 100GE services.
Manage services.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Lock WDM trails and display the lock status.


l Display client trails and server trails of a service.
l Query client trails and server trails of a service.

ROADM Configuration
By using the reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) function, you can
perform add/drop and pass-through configurations for optical channels. The WDM equipment
can use the DWC and wave selective switch (WSS) to implement the ROADM function.
l Configure ROADM based on the DWC: Groom wavelengths by using the DWC boards.
This mode applies to common nodes on chain and ring networks.
l Configure ROADM based on the WSS, including the WSSD + WSSM and WSS +
RMU/ROAM networks. This mode applies to cross-connect nodes on a ring.
l Configure ROADM based on multiplexer and demultiplexer boards: Wavelengths cannot
be groomed dynamically. This mode applies to common nodes on chain networks.

Clock Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Configure a clock source for a board.
l Configure transparent transmission for an external clock.
l Configure a clock for the SCC board, including:
Configuring clocks for optical supervisory channel boards
Specifying the clock source that the SCC board traces
Defining clock source priorities

WDM Protection Configuration


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Configure optical line protection.
l Configure extended OLP protection.
l Configure an optical wavelength protection group.
l Configure port protection.
l Configure 1:N (N 8) optical channel protection.
l Configure 1+N (N 48) optical channel protection.
l Configure protection for clock transparent transmission.
l Configure optical wavelength share protection (OWSP).
l Configure WXCP protection for GE/FC services, including:
Configuring a WXCP protection group for the sink NE
Configuring and query WXCP protection
Querying the switching status of WXCP protection
Querying services with WXCP protection
Performing working/protection switching
l Configure a TPS protection group.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Configure a DPPS protection group.


l Configure board 1+1 protection, including:
Configuring 1+1 protection for SCC boards
Configuring 1+1 protection for cross-connect and synchronous timing (XCS)
boards
Performing working/protection switching
Querying the switching status
l Configure Client 1+1 Protection.
l Configure SNCP protection, including:
Configuring sub-wavelength (SW) SNCP protection for OTU boards with GE
services or Any services
Configuring SNCP protection for ODUk services
Configuring MS SNCP protection
Configuring VLAN SNCP protection for Ethernet boards
Performing working/protection switching
Querying the switching status
l Configure board protection switching (BPS).
l Configure a distribute board protect system (DBPS). The DBPS protects the 10 gigabit
Ethernet (10GE) and GE ports on TBE boards. The cross-connection granularity is GE
service.
l Configure ODUk SRPing base on ODU1, ODU2, ODU3 and ODU4.
l Query data backup status between the active and standby SCC boards that are configured
with 1+1 protection.

Optical Power Adjustment


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Manage the optical power: Query the input power, output power, and power thresholds
of each WDM board.
l Perform intelligent power adjustment (IPA): In the event of a fiber cut, the optical
amplifier board detects signal loss at the local station. The local station reports an event
to the U2000 LCT. After the event is confirmed, the optical amplifier boards at the
upstream and downstream stations reduce their output power to a safe level to protect
fiber maintenance engineers from being injured by the laser emitted from the cut fiber.
After the fiber is reconnected, the optical signals are restored and the optical power of
each optical amplifier board automatically returns to normal levels.
l Perform automatic power equilibrium (APE). If the optical power of the channels
detected by the MCA board at the receive end is abnormal, an event is reported to the
U2000 LCT. After the event is confirmed, a command is issued to the optical attenuation
adjustment board at the upstream station to adjust the optical power of the corresponding
channels. In this manner, the optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) of each channel at the
receive end is equalized.
l Perform ROADM optical power equalization. After ROADM is enabled to dynamically
configure WDM services, the WDM equipment outputs multiplexed wavelengths. The
optical power between each channel, however, may be significantly different, especially
for new add wavelengths. To avoid negative impacts on transmission performance, the

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

ROADM optical power equalization mechanism is provided. This mechanism first


determines whether the wavelengths are pass-through wavelengths or add wavelengths.
Then, optical power adjustment starts. The DWC/WSS adjusts the optical power of pass-
through wavelengths, while the optical attenuation adjustment board adjusts the optical
power of add wavelengths based on wavelength labels.
l Configure pre-alerts for optical power at ports.

Dispersion Compensation
l Perform dispersion compensation with DCM board configured on optical NEs for each
band to achieve dispersion equalization.
l Use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely.
l In the submarine system, use a separate dispersion compensation board, such as the
TDC1 or TDC2, to perform dispersion compensation for signals on the line side of an
OTU board.

Wavelength Monitoring
On the U2000 LCT, you can perform wavelength monitoring management for the OptiX
BWS 1600G and the OptiX OSN 1800 series.

WDM PRBS
On the U2000 LCT, you can perform pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) tests on boards
to check the path quality. You can also verify that the WDM link is functioning properly
before service provisioning.

Submarine Cable Line Management


Managing submarine cable line on the U2000 LCT:
l Create unidirectional or bidirectional submarine cable lines.
l Modify unidirectional or bidirectional submarine cable lines.
l Manage underwater devices.
l Activate unidirectional or bidirectional submarine cable lines.
l Delete unidirectional or bidirectional submarine cable lines.

Submarine Cable Line Monitoring


U2000 LCT supports submarine line monitoring, you can monitor and test the status of fibers
and repeaters, and analyze test data for status monitoring and fault locating in a submarine
system. You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Monitor the status of submarine lines and repeaters without interrupting services.
l Locate faults quickly.
l Locate faults on submarine lines for interrupted services.
l Perform a variety of tests, including manual tests, comparison tests in single-test mode,
and comparison tests in periodic mode.
l Synchronize, query, and analyze test data.
l Refresh monitoring information in real time.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Query the gain report and event report.


l Monitor forward and reverse submarine cable lines at the same time.
l Query the testing status of local and peer NEs.
l Query the submarine cable line diagram.

Submarine Line Terminal Equipment Management


The submarine line terminal equipment OptiX BWS 1600S series provides electrical-layer
services access and management. The U2000 LCT provides the following functions for the
submarine line terminal equipment:

l Support configuring NE basic attributes:


Search for and create NEs by automatically discovering NE IP addresses.
Synchronize NE time.
Implement automatic disabling of NE functions.
Query physical inventories.
Modify NE attributes.
l Support extended C-band and 25 GHz channel spacing (at the rate of 10 Gbit/s).
l Support alarm cascading and signal control in the same rack.
l Support configuring orderwire.
l Support configuring WDM Services: implement unified grooming based on SDH
service, Ethernet services, ODUk services.
l Support configuring overheads:
Configure WDM overheads: including OCh overheads, OTU overheads, ODU
overheads, OPU overheads.
Configure OTN overheads: including PM overheads, TCM overheads, FTTL
overheads, SM overheads, OPU overheads.
l Support configuring WDM protection:
Configure optical line protection.
Configure extended OLP protection.
Configure inter-board wavelength protection.
Configure inter-shelf 1+1 optical channel protection.
Configure 1+1 wavelength protection on the client.
Configure 1:N optical channel protection.
Configure 1+N optical channel protection.
Configure ODUk SNCP.
l Support configuring IPA.
l Support configuring APE.
l Support configuring LPT.
l Support configuring PRBS test.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

2.2.10 WDM/OTN NE (NA) Management


NE management consists of the attributes, communications, services, protections, and clock
configurations of each NE. The configuration data is stored at the NE layer on the U2000
LCT and in the database of the corresponding NE.

Basic NE Configurations
The U2000 LCT supports the following operations:
l Synchronize NE time: Specify the interval or exact time to automatically align the time
of all NEs with the system time on the U2000 LCT or NTP server.
l Query physical resources, including:
NEs
Board manufacturer information
Boards
Subracks
Telecommunications rooms
l Display boards in plug-and-play (PnP) mode: After being inserted into slots, boards
along with their information are automatically displayed in the NE Panel.
l Automatically disable NE functions: NE functions that affect services, such as loopback
and automatic laser shutdown (ALS), are disabled at the schedule time.
l Modify NE attributes, including:
Setting NE name
Entering remarks
Enabling or disabling automatic board installation
Enabling or disabling LAN port access control
Setting start time for 24-hour performance monitoring
Enabling or disabling the daylight saving time (DST)
Modifying the IP address and subnet mask of an NE
Enabling or disabling the address resolution protocol (ARP) proxy
Enabling or disabling the open system interconnection (OSI) protocol
Modifying subrack names
Modifying the remarks of subracks
Setting the time zone and DST
Cold resetting or warm resetting an NE
Resetting an NE in the DBERASE mode, with the NE database erased
Resetting an NE in the SWDL mode after the NE software is downloaded
Enabling or disabling performance reporting
Enabling or disabling alarm reporting
Enabling or disabling database changed (DBCHG) reporting
Clearing audible and visual alarm indicators on an NE rack
Setting NE alarm delay, including the delay for alarm-start events and the delay for
alarm-end events

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Setting the longitude and latitude of an NE


Setting the state model of an NE
Setting the country code and national segment code of an NE
Enabling or disabling the buzzer of an NE
l Query and modify parameters in the window of board attributes, including:
Setting the status to active or standby
Querying the logical and physical boards of an NE
Querying the PCB version, software version, FPGA version, and BIOS version
Querying the CLEI code, vendor ID, part number, serial number, manufacturer
information, and board description
Querying the backup power and rated power voltage
Setting the upper and lower temperature thresholds and the current temperature
Setting the fan speed, working mode, and LED state
Cold resetting a board
Warm resetting a board
l Modify environmental monitoring information. You can set the NE fan speed mode and
speed level.
l Search for and create NEs by discovering their IP addresses automatically.

Orderwire Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l Set and query orderwire phone numbers, and call waiting time.
l Set and query network-wide conference call numbers.
l Set and query the length of subnet numbers.

Board Attribute Management


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l Set the status to active or standby as presented in the form of PST-PSTQ and SST.
l Query the logical and physical boards of an NE.
l Query the PCB version, software version, FPGA version, and BIOS version.
l Query the CLEI code, vendor ID, part number, serial number, manufacturing data, and
board description.
l Query the backup power and rated power voltage.
l Set the upper and lower temperature thresholds and the current temperature.
l Set the fan speed, working mode and LED state.
l Cold reset a board.
l Warm reset a board.

WDM Board Configuration


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Configure optical transponder boards.


l Configure service multiplexer and demultiplexer boards.
l Configure protection boards.
l Configure optical amplifier boards.
l Configure spectrum analysis boards.
l Configure optical supervisory channel boards.
l Configure optical add/drop multiplexer boards.
l Configure variable optical attenuation boards.
l Configure optical equalization boards.
l Configure wavelength monitoring boards.
l Configure optical equalization boards.

Overhead Configuration
l Configure and query section monitoring (SM) overheads.
l Configure and query path monitoring (PM) overheads.
l Configure and query tandem connection monitoring (TCM) overheads.
l Query optical channel payload unit (OPU) overheads.
l Configure and query fault type and fault location reporting channel (FTFL) overheads.
l Configure and query mulitframe structure identifier (MSI) overheads.

You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l Configure overheads at the OCh overhead management-SONET interface.


l Configure OTU overheads at the OCh overhead management-OTN interface.
l Configure ODU overheads at the OCh overhead management-OTN interface.
l Configure OPU overheads at the OCh overhead management-OTN interface.
l Configure TCM overheads at the OCh overhead management-OTN interface.
l Configure OTS overheads at the OCh overhead management-OTN interface.

WDM Service Configuration


At an optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) station, you can configure ADM for GE/FC
services by using the LQG, LOG, and other boards.
l Configure several WDM service boards in specified slots to form a cross-connect board
group.
l Enable the add/drop, pass-through, and loopback functions for GE services in each cross-
connect board group.
l Configure wavelength cross-connection protection (WXCP), with working and
protection cross-connections configured on the sink NE.

Configure optical cross-connections.

l Dynamically create OCh cross-connections.


l Manage optical cross-connections on boards and NEs (including creating, activating,
deactivating, deleting and querying such boards).

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Create edge ports.


Manage services.
l Lock WDM trails and display the lock status.
l View client and server trails of a service.
l Query client trails and server trails of a service.

Clock Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
Configure the master clock.
l Add a clock source.
l Delete a clock source.
l Query a clock source.
Configure the OTC clock.
l Configure the input attributes of the OTC clock.
l Configure the output attributes of the OTC clock.
l Configure the working route of the OTC clock.
l Configure the synchronization clock source.

WDM Protection Configuration


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Configure optical line protection.
l Configure 1+1 optical channel protection.
l Configure 1:N optical channel protection.
l Configure inter-subrack protection.
l Configure protection for clock transparent transmission.
l Configure WXCP protection for GE/OTU1 services, including:
Configuring the WXCP protection group for the sink NE
Configuring and querying the WXCP protection parameters
Querying the switching status of WXCP protection
Querying services configured with WXCP protection
Performing WXCP protection switching

Optical Power Adjustment


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Manage the optical power: Query the input power, output power, and power thresholds
of each WDM board.
l Perform intelligent power adjustment (IPA): In the event of a fiber cut, the optical
amplifier board detects signal loss at the local station. The local station reports an event
to the U2000 LCT. After the event is confirmed, the optical amplifier boards at the
upstream and downstream stations reduce their output power to a safe level to protect

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

fiber maintenance engineers from being injured by the laser emitted from the cut fiber.
After the fiber is reconnected, the optical signals are restored and the optical power of
each optical amplifier board automatically returns to normal levels.
l Perform automatic power equilibrium (APE). If the optical power of the channels
detected by the MCA board at the receive end is abnormal, an event is reported to the
U2000 LCT. After the event is confirmed, a command is issued to the optical attenuation
adjustment board at the upstream station to adjust the optical power of the corresponding
channels. In this manner, the optical signal noise ratio (OSNR) of each channel at the
receive end is equalized.
l Configure pre-alerts for optical power at ports.

Dispersion Compensation
l The G.652 and G.655 fibers have positive dispersion coefficients and positive dispersion
slopes in 1550 nm window. After an optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance,
the accumulation of positive dispersion broadens the optical signal pulse and seriously
affects the transmission performance. To minimize this effect, a negative DCM is used
on networks. It uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of
fibers, so as to maintain the original signal pulse.
l The OEQ NE can apply dispersion compensation to each band to reach dispersion
equalization.

Wavelength Monitoring
Wavelength monitoring uses the wavelength supervisory unit to monitor the wavelengths that
are transmitted from the WDM-side optical interface of the OTU board (including the service
convergence unit) and to control the wavelength drift. This function ensures stable
wavelengths.

WDM PRBS
You can perform PRBS on a board to check the path quality. You can also verify that the
WDM link is functioning properly before provisioning a service.

Housekeeping Configuration
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l Set and query the environmental alarm attributes, including:


Adding environmental alarm attributes
Setting the normal state of environmental attributes
Querying environmental alarm attributes
Modifying environmental alarm attributes
Deleting environmental alarm attributes
l Set and query external control attributes, including:
Adding external control attributes
Querying external control attributes
Modifying external control attributes
Deleting external control attributes

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Setting the control time of the external control relay

Query of AO Buffer Records


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Query the records in the automatic output (AO) buffer, including:
Generation time of a record
Auto report tag (ATAG) of a record
Record type
Remarks
l Filter records in the AO buffer.
l Save records in the AO buffer to a file.
l Export records in the AO buffer to the browser of the operating system for printing.

2.2.11 PTN NE Management


NE configuration includes the configuration of attributes, communications, services,
protection schemes, and clocks on an NE.

Basic NE Configurations
The U2000 LCT supports the following operations and features:
l Set the following NE attributes:
NE name
NE ID
Extended NE ID
Remarks
l Synchronize NE time: Specify the interval or exact time to automatically align the time
of all NEs with the system time of the U2000 LCT server.
l Display boards in plug-and-play (PnP) mode: After being inserted into slots, boards
along with their information are automatically displayed in the NE Panel.
l Automatically disable NE functions: NE functions that affect services, such as loopback
and automatic laser shutdown (ALS), are disabled at the schedule time.
l Set environmental monitoring information.
l Replace boards.
l Manage fans.

Configuration of Service Interface Types


The working mode and application scenarios of an interface are determined by the basic
attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3 attributes and advanced attributes of the interface.
Basic attributes are the physical attributes of an interface. Layer 2 attributes are the data link
layer attributes of an interface, such as ATM, VLAN, and QinQ. Layer 3 attributes are the
network layer attributes of an interface, such as an IP attribute. Advanced attributes are the
maintainability and service attributes of an interface.
Table 2-11 lists the types of PTN service interfaces supported by the U2000 LCT.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Table 2-11 Types of PTN service interfaces

Service Supported Port Type MP Group Function


Interface Port Mode/ Supported or
Encapsulation Not
Type

SDH interface Basic attributes Physical port Not supported Sets basic
attributes for an
SDH interface.

Layer 2 Physical port Not supported Sets Layer 2


attributes attributes for an
SDH interface.
The interface
can then be
used to carry
ATM services.

Layer 3 Physical port Not supported Sets Layer 3


attributes attributes for an
SDH interface.
The interface
can then be
used to carry
tunnels when
the PPP
protocol is
enabled.

Advanced Physical port N/A Sets advanced


attributes attributes for an
SDH interface.

PDH interface Basic attributes Physical port Not supported Sets basic
attributes for a
PDH interface.
The interface
can then be
used to carry
TDM services.

Layer 3 Physical port Supported Enables the


attributes PDH interface
to act as a
member in a
Multilink PPP
(MP) group
after Layer 3
attributes are
set for the
interface and
the PPP
protocol is
enabled.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Service Supported Port Type MP Group Function


Interface Port Mode/ Supported or
Encapsulation Not
Type

Advanced Physical port N/A Sets advanced


attributes attributes for a
PDH interface.

Ethernet Basic attributes Physical port Not supported Sets basic


interface attributes for an
Ethernet
interface.

Flow Control Physical port N/A Sets flow


control for an
Ethernet
interface.

Layer 2 Physical port Not supported Sets Layer 2


attributes attributes for an
Ethernet
interface. The
interface can
then be used to
carry user-side
or network-side
Ethernet
services.

Layer 3 Physical port Not supported Sets Layer 3


attributes attributes for an
Ethernet
interface. The
interface can
then be used to
carry tunnels.

Advanced Physical port N/A Sets advanced


attributes attributes for an
Ethernet
interface.

Ethernet virtual Basic attributes Logical port Not supported Sets basic
interface attributes for an
Ethernet virtual
interface so that
you can create
VLAN
subinterfaces,
EOA virtual
interfaces, or
Layer 3 virtual
interfaces.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Service Supported Port Type MP Group Function


Interface Port Mode/ Supported or
Encapsulation Not
Type

Layer 3 Logical port Not supported Sets Layer 3


attributes attributes for a
VLAN
subinterface or
an EOA virtual
interface. After
being
configured with
Layer 3
attributes, an
EOA virtual
interface can be
used to carry IP
or GRE tunnels,
a VLAN
subinterface can
be used to carry
L3VPN
services or
tunnels, and a
Layer 3 virtual
interface can be
used to carry
IP-Line
services.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Service Supported Port Type MP Group Function


Interface Port Mode/ Supported or
Encapsulation Not
Type

Layer Mix Logical port Not supported VE interface


can be used in
the line-free
static L3VPN
service
interworking
scenarios where
layer 2 and
layer 3 services
interconnect
with each other,
the UNI
interface of the
layer 2 E-Line
or E-LAN
service is
configured as
an L2VE
interface; a
VLAN
aggregation
subinterface is
created based
on the L3VE
interface; the
UNI interface
of the L3VPN
service is
configured as
the VLAN
aggregation
subinterface.
Then, layer 2
and layer 3
services are
bound by using
the bridging
relationship
between the VE
interfaces. In
this way,
services can
interconnect
with each other
without line
connection

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Service Supported Port Type MP Group Function


Interface Port Mode/ Supported or
Encapsulation Not
Type

between
physical ports.
VLAN
aggregation
subinterface is
created based
on the L3VE
interface and
used in the line-
free static
L3VPN service
interworking
scenarios where
layer 2 and 3
services
interconnect
with each other.

Advanced Logical port Not supported The Password


Attributes Encryption and
Authentication
parameters to
the port can be
set through
setting the
advanced
attributes of
Ethernet virtual
interfaces.

ADSL interface Basic attributes Physical port N/A Sets basic


attributes for an
ADSL
interface.

DSLTRUNK Logical port N/A Sets


attributes DSLTRUNK
attributes for an
ADSL
interface. The
interface can
then be used to
carry ADSL
signals.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Service Supported Port Type MP Group Function


Interface Port Mode/ Supported or
Encapsulation Not
Type

G.SHDSL Basic attributes Physical port N/A Sets basic


interface attributes for a
G.SHDSL
interface.

Binding mode N/A N/A Sets the binding


mode of a
G.SHDSL
interface to
carry G.SHDSL
signals.

EFM binding Logical port N/A Configures an


group EFM binding
group for a
G.SHDSL
interface.

ATM binding Logical port N/A Configures an


group ATM binding
group for a
G.SHDSL
interface.

IMA binding Logical port N/A Configures an


group IMA binding
group for a
G.SHDSL
interface to
carry G.SHDSL
signals.

Serial interface Basic attributes N/A N/A Sets basic


attributes for a
serial interface.

Layer 3 Logical port Supported Makes a PPP-


attributes enabled serial
interface act as
a member in an
MP group after
Layer 3
attributes are
set for the
interface.

MP Group Basic attributes N/A N/A Sets basic


attributes for an
MP group.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Service Supported Port Type MP Group Function


Interface Port Mode/ Supported or
Encapsulation Not
Type

Layer 3 Logical port N/A Sets Layer 3


attributes attributes for an
MP group. The
group can then
be used to carry
tunnels.

IS-IS Protocol Configuration


The U2000 LCT uses the intermediate system-to-intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol as a
protocol of the network control plane, and supports the following operations:

l Configure node attributes.


l Configure port attributes.
l Import routes.
l Configure the link TE information.
l Configure GR sessions.
l Configure route aggregation.
l View route forwarding tables.

OSPF Protocol Configuration


The U2000 LCT uses the open shortest path first (OSPF) protocol for the network control
plane and provides the following configurations:
l Configure node attributes.
l Configure port attributes.
l Configure peer attributes.
l Import routes.
l Configure the link TE information.
l Configure route aggregation.
l Query peer information.
l View route forwarding tables.

MP-BGP Protocol Configuration


The U2000 LCT uses the internal border gateway protocol (IBGP) to implement L3VPN
functions, and supports the following operations:
l Configure IBGP instances.
l Configure IBGP peers.
l Configure route filtering policies.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Configure and query the MP-BGP peer group parameters.

LDP Protocol Configuration


The U2000 LCT uses the label distribution protocol (LDP) to create LSP connections and PW
connections, and supports the following operations:
l Configure session attributes.
l Configure node attributes.
l Configure port attributes.
l Configure IP address filtering tables.
l Configure routing policies.
l Configure label policies.

RSVP Protocol Configuration


The U2000 LCT uses the resource reserved protocol (RSVP) to create LSP connections, and
supports the following operations:
l Configure node attributes.
l Configure port attributes.

Static Route Management Configuration


The U2000 LCT supports the configuration of static route management.

Address Resolution Configuration


The U2000 LCT supports the configuration of address resolution.

l Configure address parse.


l Configure ARP attributes.

Clock Configuration
The U2000 LCT supports configurations of multiple clock modes:
l Configure clock domains in a unified manner.
l Query the status of clock synchronization.
l Configure the IEEE 1588 clock.
Configure clock services.
Configure clock synchronization attributes.
Configure the clock source priority tables.
Configure clock subnets.
Configure external time interfaces.
l Configure the ACR clocks
Configure the CES ACR, 1588 ACR Multicast clocks and 1588 ACR Unicast
clocks.
l Configure physical-layer clocks

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Query the status of clock synchronization.


Set clock source priority tables, including
n System clock source priority list
n Priority for phase-locked sources of the first external clock output
n Priority for phase-locked sources of the second external clock output
Set clock source switching parameters, including:
n Clock source reversion parameters
n Clock source switching conditions
n Clock source switching control
Configure clock subnets, including:
n Clock subnets
n Clock quality
n SSM output control
n Clock ID status
Set phase-locked sources of external clock output, including:
n Phase-locked sources of external clock output
n Attributes of 2M phase-locked sources of external clocks
Set clock source status, including:
n Clock Source
n Direction
n Output status
n Mode
l Configure frequency selection mode.

Board-Level Protection Configuration


You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Configure TPS protection of a subboard.
l Configure board 1+1 protection for the SCC and cross-connect boards.
l Check the switching status.
l Perform protection switching.

Synchronization Protocol Configuration


In dual-homing application scenarios, both the MC LAG and the MC LMSP need to learn
about the status of the opposite end and determine which actions to take based on the different
types of failures that occur. With the configured information about the opposite end, a channel
is established for control status synchronization between the two ends. In this manner, the
sending and receiving of packets can be controlled and link fault detection can be performed.

LAG/MC LAG Configuration


A link aggregation group (LAG) aggregates multiple Ethernet physical links to form a logical
link with a higher transmission rate. This function improves link availability and increases
link capacity.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

A multi-chassis (MC) LAG achieves load sharing between NEs.


The U2000 LCT enables you to set the following LAG/MC LAG attributes:
l Load sharing type (sharing or non-sharing)
l LAG types (manual or static)
l Service distribution algorithm
l Port and system priorities

LMSP/MC LMSP Configuration


Linear MSP (LMSP) includes 1+1 linear MSP and 1:N linear MSP. The protection scheme
uses the protection channel to protect services that are transmitted on the working channel.
When the working channel fails, services are switched to the protection channel. Linear MSP
is applicable to the POS interface and structured STM interface.
The multi-chassis (MC) LMSP can implement the LMSP between NEs.
The U2000 LCT supports the following LMSP/MC LMSP configurations:
l Create LMSP groups.
l Check the status of LMSP groups.
l Perform LMSP switching.

MSTP Configuration
The multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) can be used to clear loops in a network. The
MSTP uses a specific algorithm to block some redundant trails and change a loop network to
a non-loop tree network. This function prevents packet increase in a loop network and
generation of broadcast storms in an endless cycle. Unlike the STP and RSTP, the MSTP can
forward data according to VLAN packets, achieving load balance of VLAN data.
The U2000 LCT provides the following operations:
l Configure parameters of port groups and bridges.
l Configure CIST and MSTI parameters.
l Query CIST status and MSTI status.

IGMP Snooping Configuration


The Internet group management protocol snooping (IGMP Snooping) is a scheme of multicast
constraints on Layer 2 equipment, and is used to manage and control multicast groups.
The U2000 LCT supports the configuration of IGMP snooping for E-LAN services, and
provides the following operations:
l Configure IGMP Snooping protocol parameters.
l Configure fast-leave ports.
l Manage routes.
l Configure route member ports.
l Query statistics of IGMP protocol packets.
l Manage Route Member Ports for V3.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Configure SSM mapping.

BFD Configuration
The bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) protocol can be used to check the Ethernet link
status.

BFD is a simple Hello protocol. It is similar to the neighbor detection of well-known


protocols in many aspects. A pair of systems periodically sends detection packets on the
bidirectional channel where sessions between the two systems were created. If one system
does not receive any detection packets from the other within a specific time, the system
assumes that there is a failure on the bidirectional channel.

The U2000 LCT supports BFD detection on IP and GRE tunnels, IGP, PWs, and static routes.

LPT Configuration
The link state pass through (LPT) protocol is used to return the remote-end link status to the
near end. The near-end equipment performs operations according to the remote-end link
status. When the intermediate transmission network is faulty, the LPT immediately informs
the access equipment at both ends of the transmission network of the necessity to use the
backup network. In this manner, the transmission of data, especially of important data, is
ensured.

QoS Configuration
Quality of service (QoS) refers to the performance of the data flow transmission in a network.
The QoS is used to ensure end-to-end service quality. The QoS cannot enhance the
bandwidth, but it can minimize the delay and jitter in a network by properly allocating and
monitoring network resources. In this way, the service quality is ensured.

The DiffServ (DS) domain consists of a group of network nodes with the DiffServ function.
Nodes of this type are also called DS nodes. In a DS domain, all DS nodes adopt the same
service provisioning policy to achieve the same per-hop behavior (PHB). DS nodes are
classified into edge DS nodes and internal DS nodes. Edge DS nodes usually perform
complex flow classification on the traffic that enters the DS domain. Traffic of different types
is marked with different PHB service types. Internal DS nodes only need to perform simple
flow classification based on PHB service types.

The U2000 LCT supports the following QoS configurations:

l Configure QoS templates.


l Configure DiffServ domains.
l Configure ATM CoS mapping.
l Configure SVLAN DEI used flag.
l Configure simple flow classification and complex flow classification.
l Recognizes IPV6 ToS.
l Configure CAR and shaping.
l Configure color blindness modes.
l Configure WFQ schedule policies.
l Configure port WRED policies.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Configure service WRED policies.


l Simplify operations and share some common QoS configuration parameters. The U2000
LCT enables users to create QoS function point policies, including port policies, ATM
policies, V-UNI ingress policies, V-UNI egress policies, PW policies, and QinQ policies.
By using these function point policies, you can bind configurations for CAR attributes,
shaping attributes, flow classification attributes, WFQ schedule policies, WRED
policies, and color blindness modes.
l Configure CoS queue scheduling mapping.
l Configure QoS templates for applying the same QoS policies to multiple NEs.

MPLS Tunnel Configuration


The multi-protocol label switch (MPLS) protocol allows service packets to transmit
transparently. The MPLS tunnel is defined by the MPLS protocol. Independent of services, an
MPLS tunnel enables E2E transmission and provides channels for service-related PWs.

As shown in Figure 2-15, unicast MPLS tunnels are mainly used to transparently transmit
point-to-point PWE3 services.

Figure 2-15 Unicast MPLS tunnels

The U2000 LCT provides the following functions associated with MPLS tunnels on a per-NE
basis:

l Configure MPLS basic attributes.


l Configure static unicast MPLS tunnels.
l Create forward and backward MPLS tunnels at the same time.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Create static and bidirectional MPLS tunnels.


l Create the E-LSP.
l Manage PWs.
l Manage tunnel labels and PW labels.

MPLS Tunnel Protection Group Configuration


The U2000 LCT provides the following functions associated with MPLS tunnel protection
groups:
l Create MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection groups and MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection groups and
configure the switching mode, revertive mode, wait-to-restore (WTR) time, and hold-off
time for the groups.
l Perform MPLS tunnel protection switching.
l Query the status of an MPLS tunnel protection group.

MS PW Configuration
By creating multi-segment pseudo wires (MS-PWs) to transmit services, you can save tunnel
resources and transmit services over different networks.

PW APS/MC PW APS Configuration


As a network protection mechanism, PW automatic protection switching (APS) is intended to
protect the services on the working PW. That is, when the working PW malfunctions, the
services on the working PW are switched to the protection PW. In this manner, the services on
the working PW are protected.
The following PW APS/MC PW APS functions can be performed on a per-NE basis:
l Create protection groups.
l Bind the master and slave protection pairs.

IP Tunnel and GRE Tunnel Configuration


If the equipment at the two ends of an IP network does not support MPLS tunnels, PWE3
services can travel through the IP network by means of IP tunnels or GRE tunnels.
IP tunnels and GRE tunnels mainly apply to the offload scenarios of mobile communication.
The U2000 LCT supports the configuration of bidirectional IP tunnels and GRE tunnels on a
per-NE basis.
Supports Offload protection configuration between MPLS and IP/GRE tunnels.

Dual-Homing Protection Configuration


In dual-homing protection scenarios, two PE nodes (dual-homing nodes) are connected to one
CE node through attachment circuit (AC) links so that the services received by the PE nodes
at both ends of the bearer network can be protected.
The following types of dual-homing protection can be configured for ATM and CES services:
l 1:1 MC-PW APS and 1:1 MC-LMSP

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l 1:1 MC-PW APS and 1+1 MC-LMSP


l 1:1 PW redundancy protection and 1:1 MC-LMSP
l 1:1 PW redundancy protection and 1+1 MC-LMSP

The following types of dual-homing protection can be configured for E-line services:
l 1:1 MC-PW APS and MC-LAG
l 1:1 PW redundancy protection and MC-LAG

CES Service Configuration


Circuit emulation services (CES services) achieve transparent transmission of TDM circuit
switching data on the PSN.

As shown in Figure 2-16, the 2G/3G stations or enterprise private line accesses the PTN
equipment by using the E1, T1, or channelized STM-1 line. The equipment divides the E1 and
T1 signals into pieces and encapsulates the pieces on the Ethernet. Net, the E1 and T1 signals
are transmitted to the opposite end by means of PWs.

Figure 2-16 CES service application model

The U2000 LCT provides the following functions associated with CES services:

l Create CES services and corresponding PWs at the same time.


l Create UNI-UNI and UNI-NNI CES services.
l Create CES services in CESoPSN and SAToP modes. CESoPSN is short for structure-
aware TDM circuit emulation services over packet switched network and SAToP is short
for structure-agnostic TDM over packet.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Configure QoS policies for CES services.


l Configure the value for idle timeslot recovery.
l Carry CES services over IP/GRE tunnels.
l Configure transparent transmission for CES service alarms.
l Modify the tunnel that carries PWs without interrupting services.

ATM Service Configuration


ATM emulation services achieve transparent transmission of ATM services on the PSN.
As shown in Figure 2-17, the 3G station accesses the PTN equipment by using the ATM IMA
group. The equipment encapsulates the ATM cells into the Ethernet, and transmits the ATM
cells to the opposite end by using the PW.

Figure 2-17 ATM service application model

The U2000 LCT provides the following functions associated with ATM services:
l Create ATM services that contain multiple ATM connections.
l Create UNI-UNI and UNI-NNI ATM services.
l Create PVP and PVC ATM services.
l Create ATM services and corresponding PWs at the same time.
l Configure IMA groups.
l Configure QoS policies for ATM services.
l Configure CoS mapping.
l Modify the tunnel that carries PWs without interrupting services.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

E-Line Service Configuration


E-line services achieve point-to-point transparent transmission of service data. The equipment
transmits user packets from the user side to the network side based on Port or Port+VLAN.

As shown in Figure 2-18, company A has branches in City 1 and City 3. Company C has
branches in City 1 and City 2. Branches of Company A or Company C that are in different
cities need data communication. The PTN equipment can provide E-line services for
Company A and Company C, to meet their communication requirements. In addition, the
service data can be completely isolated.

Figure 2-18 E-Line Service

The U2000 LCT supports the following functions associated with E-Line services on a per-
NE basis:

l Create UNI-UNI E-Line services.


l Create UNI-NNI E-Line services that are carried on ports.
l Create UNI-NNI E-Line services that are carried on PWs.
l Create UNI-NNI E-Line services that are carried on QinQ links.
l Configure QoS policies for L2VPN services and corresponding PWs during the creation
of L2VPN services.
l Configure V-UNI groups.
l Modify the tunnel that carries PWs without interrupting services.

E-LAN Service Configuration


E-LAN service is multipoint-to-multipoint Ethernet service. Based on the self-learning of
layer 2 MAC addresses, E-LAN services achieve packet forwarding between multiple V-UNI
and NNI access points.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

See Figure 2-19. The HQ of Company A is in City 3. Company A has Branch A in City 1,
City 2, and City 3, and has Branch B in City 1 and City 2. Branch A and Branch B do not
conduct any business with each other. The data should be isolated between the two branches.
The HQ needs to communicate with each branch and access the Internet.

Figure 2-19 E-LAN Service

E-LAN services use different VLAN IDs to identify service data of different branches. In this
way, data is shared within a branch and is isolated from the data for other branches. The
Internet data of the HQ is also isolated from the internal service data by means of the VLAN.

The U2000 LCT supports the following functions associated with E-LAN services on a per-
NE basis:

l Create E-LAN services that are carried on ports.


l Create E-LAN services that are carried on QinQ links.
l Create E-LAN services that are carried on PWs.
l Configure the V-UNI and NNI interfaces of an E-LAN service.
l Configure the split horizon group of an E-LAN service.
l Configure V-UNI groups.
l Configure the MAC address learning parameters.
l Configure the unknown frame processing mode.
l Configure the static MAC address.
l Disable an MAC address.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Configure the self-learning of MAC addresses.


l Modify the tunnel that carries PWs without interrupting services.

Service Mirroring Configuration


In service mirroring, all packets that enter a certain port are duplicated and then duplicated
packets are transmitted through an observation port. In this manner, the service is scarcely
affected when packets of the mirrored service are analyzed. The product does not resolve or
process the captured data.
You can configure local service mirroring.

MPLS OAM Configuration


MPLS OAM refers to a group of OAM functions that can check the quality of LSPs in an
MPLS network. The MPLS OAM scheme can effectively detect, report, and handle a defect
inside the network at the MPLS layer in addition to triggering protection switching when a
malfunction occurs.
The U2000 LCT provides the following MPLS OAM functions:
l Configure MPLS OAM parameters for tunnels.
l Perform CV/FFD checks.
l Perform LSP ping checks.
l Perform PW ping checks.
l Perform LSP traceroute checks.
l Perform PW traceroute checks.
l Enable and disable FDI.

Ethernet Service OAM Configuration


Ethernet service OAM refers to a group of end-to-end OAM functions that can check the
quality of Ethernet links with multiple NEs. The Ethernet service OAM scheme can send
OAM packets that are handled only at the MAC layer. As a low rate protocol, the OAM
protocol occupies very low network bandwidth; therefore, it does not affect services carried
on the link.
The U2000 LCT provides the following Ethernet service OAM functions:
l Create maintenance domains (MDs), maintenance associations (MAs), maintenance end
points (MEPs), and maintenance intermediate points (MIPs)
l Perform CC checks.
l Perform LB checks.
l Perform LT checks.

Ethernet Port OAM Configuration


Ethernet port OAM is mainly used to automatically check the connectivity and performance
and locate faults on physical links under the MAC layer. It is used when the physical Ethernet
ports are directly connected.
The U2000 LCT provides the following Ethernet port OAM functions:

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Configure OAM parameters.


l Configure OAM error frame monitoring.

ATM OAM Configuration


ATM OAM refers to a group of end-to-end OAM functions that can check the quality of ATM
links with multiple NEs. The ATM OAM functions check an ATM link by inserting some
OAM cells with standard cell structures into the user cell flow.

The U2000 LCT provides the following ATM OAM functions:

l Set segment end attributes.


l Perform CC activation tests.
l Perform remote loopbacks.
l Set the LLID.
l Insert OAM cell to ATM.

NMS Server Configuration


After the IP address of the NMS is configured on the gateway NE, all the managed non-
gateway NEs can automatically go online after being powered on.

Power-Off Notification
The PTN equipment sends a power-off notification to the U2000 before it is totally powered
off. According to this notification, the U2000 determines whether the failure to manage the
equipment is caused by a power failure or a DCN fault such as a fiber cut.

Inter-Frame Gap Configuration


PTN equipment supports the adjustment of inter-frame gaps for ports, which can be used for
the wire speed of ports.

Board Insertion and Removal Notification


When a faulty board is replaced, related indicators on the U2000 LCT will blink.

Setting SNMP NMS Parameters


When the OSS obtains alarm and performance data from NE over SNMP, you need to
configure IP address and permission control parameters of OSS on the U2000.

Setting Control Plane DCN Packet Priority and Bandwidth


In a DCN that packets travel on the control plane, DCN and service packets share the same
forward channels. Therefore, you need to set the control plane DCN packet priority and
bandwidth.

Adding 1+1 Protection for the AUX Board


AUX board 1+1 protection is added for PTN3900-8 equipment.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Performing a Network-Wide PRBS Test


Network-wide PRBS tests can determine network services function properly based on the bit
error rate (BER) and the test results are displayed in a table or chart. The test results help
maintenance engineers learn the QoS over the current service channel in time.

This feature provides the following functions:

l Viewing network-wide PRBS test status.


l Shifting from a record to the test result in the NE Explorer.
l Starting the test from a record.
l Stopping the test from a record.
l Querying the data from NE.
l Saving network-wide test results to files.
l Checking test-related CES services.

AIE Board Protection


This feature provides the following functions:

l Viewing protection status of AIE boards.


l Performing protection switching manually.

MPLS OAM Switching


This feature provides the following functions:

l Switching OAM recommendations.


l Switching to the OAM dual-stack mode.

Control Plane Configuration: VRF Cross-Connection Management


This feature provides the following functions:

l Binding public VRF tunnels automatically or manually.


l Querying VRF Cross-Connection Management.

MPLS-TP OAM Configuration


Complying with MPLS-TP standards, MPLS-TP OAM provides the following OAM
functions for MPLS-TP networks:

l Checking, discovering, and locating a defect inside the network at the MPLS layer.
l Reporting and handling the defect.
l Triggering protection switching when a fault occurs.

This feature provides the following functions:

l Setting MEP parameters.


l Performing a CC check.
l Performing pings.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Performing traceroutes.
l Performing LB tests.
l Performing LT tests.
l Performing TST tests.
l Checking packet loss ratios and delay.
l Performing Throughput tests.
l Configuring maintenance intermediate points (MIPs).

The 802.1X/Remote Authentication dial-in User Service (RADIUS) Management


To perform security authentication for base stations connected to ensure security of the bearer
network, and to control access of PTN edge equipment based on authentication results.

MPLS Ring Protection Management


This feature adds an independent ring layer, which does not affect services. The MPLS ring
protection, similar to SDH ring protection, provides reliable protection capabilities to
withstand multi-node failures. This feature provides the following functions:
l To discover MPLS rings automatically.
l To view the topology of MPLS rings.
l To refresh and query the protection switching status of MPLS rings.
l To create MPLS protection ring protection.
l To manage MPLS ring protection.
l To delete MPLS ring protection.
l To bind a tunnel to or unbind a tunnel from a protected MPLS ring.
l To unbind multiple tunnels from a protected MPLS ring at a time.
l To diagnose faults on protected MPLS rings.
l To display alarms for protected MPLS rings.
l To configure or delete the intersecting nodes of protected MPLS rings.

Network Resource Statistics Report


The network resource statistics report is used to collect live-network statistics for planning
customers' networks. This feature provides the function of collecting the numbers of the
following items:
l Nodes
l IS-IS peers
l Data communication network (DCN) links
l DCN nodes
l Tunnels
l L2VPN PWs
l L2VPN T-LDP peers
l L3VPN VRFs
l L3VPN routes, including L3VPN routes at the local end

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l L3VPN BGP peers

Association Between Channel Alarms on Relays and Channel Names


The U2000 separately displays alarms for different channels and allows users to define alarm
names.

Plus Sign (+) in NE Names


The U2000 allows the plus sign (+) in NE names to meet NE naming requirements.

Link-based IP Ping
The U2000 adds Ping to the shortcut menu for fibers in the Main Topology. This feature
facilitates link continuity checks.

PTN LAG Protection Group Configuration Export


This feature allows users to export PTN LAG protection groups to files using the Save As
operation and view the configurations of the LAG protection groups. The file format can be
XLS, CSV, HTML, and TXT.

Service Mapping Diagram


The service mapping diagram feature allows users to view port and channel usage, query
services efficiently, and switch between windows. The U2000 supports the service mapping
diagrams of Ethernet, E1, channelized STM-1, and POD41 boards.

Support PTN NE replacement


To replace PTN NEs if they are faulty and restore their data to new NEs, which improves the
fault recovery efficiency.

Support the data communications channel (DCC) view


l To ascertain the network locations of PTN NEs quickly during new deployment by
searching for them in the DCC view.
l To find data communication network (DCN) links between a PTN NE and its gateway
NE by querying DCC link information in the DCC view during maintenance, which
facilitates DCN fault diagnosis.
l To query the scale of a single DCN domain and export the scale data of network-wide
DCN domains.

Support NE-level Performance Monitoring Templates for PTN NEs


To monitor the performance of one or multiple PTN NEs quickly, which improves the
performance monitoring efficiency on PTN networks.

Support Checking PTN Network Health


Health check on PTN networks is performed on a graphical user interface (GUI) for
centralized check and performance indicator monitoring, by which users can check the current

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

and historical running status of networks in routine maintenance. In this way, network risks
are fixed in time to prevent network problems.

Support the Interconnection Between Layer 2 And Layer 3 Services Without Line
Connection Between Physical Ports
In the line-free static L3VPN service interworking scenarios, you need to create a Virtual
Ethernet (VE) group to connect the L2VE interface with the L3VE interface. In this manner,
layer 2 services can be forwarded internally to layer 3 services, which avoids line connection
between physical ports, saves port resources, and simplifies operations.

Test Suite Function Enhancement


l Supports creation of continuous ping test suites and definition of alarm thresholds.
l Supports creation of test cases through duplication.

TWAMP Check
l Allows PTN devices to support TWAMP (RFC 5347) tests in L3 PTN or edge access
PTN scenarios.
l Supports performance task creation in the PMS module, allows the U2000 to collect
performance indicators, and displays delay, packet loss, and jitter indicators in figures
and tables.

Support the Syslog Feature


Allows logs to be backed up to the external Syslog server either manually or at a self-defined
interval.

Support Obtaining of Packet Headers


Supports obtaining of packet headers and record them to files during PTN network fault
locating, which helps analyze faults in detail. The U2000 does not parse or handle the
obtained packet headers.

2.2.12 IP NE Management
IP NE management allows you to configure and maintain routers by means of the graphical
user interface (GUI).

Device Management
l Automatically identify device types and software versions to implement device-based
management.
l Automatically obtain and refresh information about entities such as subracks, boards,
power supply units, fans, and ports, and monitor status of these entities.
l Display the front panel view of an NE, including subracks, boards, power supply units,
fans, and ports in the NE Panel.
l Display the running status and alarm status of boards and ports in the NE Panel by using
alarm indicators and colored legends.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

l Perform the following operations on the NE panel: view common information and
alarms of NEs, boards, and ports; view real-time performance of boards and ports; reset
boards and daughter boards; perform active/standby switchover for control boards and
multi-subrack cluster NEs.
l Monitor link and NE status, collect monitoring data, and export the monitoring data to
text files, which makes it convenient for users to summarize, analyze, and report the
data.

Interface Management
You can configure a variety of media interfaces on the U2000 LCT, including physical and
logical interfaces.

l Physical interfaces are supported by components. The U2000 LCT supports


configuration of Ethernet interfaces, packet over SDH/SONET (POS) interfaces,
channelized POS (CPOS) interfaces, asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) interfaces, and
E1 interfaces.
l Logical interfaces are created to exchange data, though they do not physically exist. The
U2000 LCT supports configuration of subinterfaces, trunk interfaces, tunnel interfaces,
virtual Ethernet (VE) interfaces, loopback interfaces, virtual template (VT) interfaces,
virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces, ATM-Bundle interfaces, and inverse
multiplexing over ATM (IMA)-group interfaces.

Clock Management
Routers must support clock/time synchronization to meet requirements of base stations on an
IP radio access network (IP RAN).

The U2000 LCT supports Precision Time Protocol (PTP) clock management, physical clock
management, querying the clock tracking status, and view the switching records of the clock
source for routers.

With the PTP clock management function, you can perform the following operations on the
U2000 LCT:
l Configure global PTP information.
After global PTP is configured for all NEs on the clock synchronization network, PTP
clock signals can be properly transmitted over the clock synchronization network.
l Configure a local or BITS clock source and port PTP attributes.
l Configure an adaptive clock.

With the physical clock management function, you can perform the following operations on
the U2000 LCT:
l Configure global physical clock information.
l Configure a port clock source or another clock source.
A port clock source is configured on a router port. To configure a port clock source,
you must select the desired port manually and set mandatory parameters such as
clock enabling and SSM level.
Another clock source can be the BITS or PTP clock source of a router. On the
U2000 LCT, such a clock source cannot be created and only its attributes can be
queried or modified.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

LLDP Management
The U2000 LCT can discover Layer 2 links and display them if the Link Layer Discovery
Protocol (LLDP) function is configured for NEs and interfaces.
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Configure LLDP globally.
l Configure LLDP on interfaces.
l Synchronize LLDP neighbor information.

Ethernet Feature Management


Ethernet is a main TCP/IP LAN and MAN technology that features fast data transmission,
excellent compatibility, and low costs. You can perform the following operations on the
U2000 LCT:
l Configure global VLANs, port VLANs, VLAN stacking, and VLAN mapping.
l Manage media access control (MAC) addresses.
Setting static MAC addresses, MAC address learning rules, and MAC address aging
time, and querying dynamic MAC addresses.
l Manage VLAN switches.

Ethernet OAM Management


Ethernet operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) is mainly used to check
connectivity, evaluate performance, and locate faults for Ethernet links. The IEEE 802.1ag
and IEEE 802.3ah are used to implement Ethernet OAM. With IEEE 802.1ag, the U2000 LCT
can continuously monitor user services, and acknowledge and locate faults. With IEEE
802.3ah, the U2000 LCT can monitor last-mile user services and report faults.
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Manage global information.
l Use IEEE 802.1ag-related functions. Specifically, manage and maintain the following
items: maintenance domains (MDs), maintenance associations (MAs), local maintenance
association end points (MEPs), remote MEPs, and maintenance association intermediate
points (MIPs). You can also perform connectivity fault management-bidirectional
forwarding detection (CFM-BFD) binding and CFM-CFM binding.
l Use IEEE 802.3ah-related functions. Specifically, configure the Ethernet OAM protocol,
query ports, perform loopback tests, and perform Ethernet in the first mile (EFM)-BFD
binding and EFM-CFM binding.
l Manage tests and diagnoses.
l Collect OAM statistics.
l Y.1731
The following Y.1731 functions can be configured and managed:
For PWE3, VPLS, and VLAN services in on-demand mode, packet discard and
delay at a single end, delay at both ends, and OAM configuration and statistical
collection are supported.
For PWE3, VPLS, and VLAN services in proactive mode, packet discard at both
ends and OAM configuration are supported.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

MPLS-TP OAM Management


MPLS-TP OAM is used for the operation and maintenance of Multiprotocol Label Switching
Transport Profile (MPLS-TP). The U2000 LCT supports the following MPLS-TP OAM
management functions:

l Performs MPLS-TP OAM management on PWE3 services and bidirectional static LSPs.
l Performs section OAM management.
l Collects statistics about single-ended frame loss, one-way frame delay, and two-way
frame delay in on-demand mode and dual-ended frame loss in proactive mode.

ATM OAM Management


ATM OAM is implemented based on ATM service streams. It is used to detect and locate
ATM link connectivity faults. The U2000 LCT supports the following ATM OAM
management functions:

l Configure ATM OAM globally: to specify the locate loopback ID (LLID) for an NE in
ATM OAM cell loopback detection.
l Create ATM OAM detection: ATM OAM can be detected using LB, CC, End-to-end LB
test. ATM link faults can be detected and located by viewing alarm status and statistics.
l Running an LB Test: link faults are detected and located based on whether loopback cells
can be received.
l View alarm status or statistics: to understand the link status in real time and view details
about any faults occurred in the link.

NE Channel Management
You can configure management channels on NEs. Detailed features are VTY configuration,
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) service, local user management, log service, alarm service, and
Secure Shell (SSH) service.

QoS Management
Quality of Service (QoS) functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the
effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the
demands of users. The U2000 LCT performs QoS management on Datacomm devices
through the CBQoS, HQoS, discard policy, DS domain policy, interface QoS configuration,
mirroring configuration, and system QoS tool. You can perform the following operations on
the U2000 LCT:

l Configure and manage traffic classifications, traffic behaviors, and traffic policies.
l Configure and manage interface QoS and system QoS.
l Configure DiffServ domain policies.
l Configure and manage traffic mirroring and port mirroring.
l Configure and manage hierarchical QoS (HQoS) functions, including discard policies,
HQoS traffic queue policies, HQoS traffic queue mapping, HQoS schedulers, HQoS user
scheduling, and QoS templates.
l Generate a global template from certain existing QoS configurations and bulk apply the
template to NEs, improving deployment efficiency.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Route Management
The U2000 LCT supports IPv4 route configuration and maintenance for NEs.

You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:


l View routing information.
l Configure global parameters for routes.
l Configure IP address prefixes.
l Configure routes, including static routes, Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routes, Open
Shortest Path First (OSPF) routes, and Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-
IS) routes.
l Configure routing policies.
l View the running information about OSPF and IS-IS, the BGP peer, the BGP peer group,
as well as the BGP peer and BGP peer group in a VPN instance address family.

MPLS Management
Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) is used to transparently transmit packets between
users. The U2000 LCT supports NE-level MPLS management.

You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:

l Enable MPLS, Label Distribution Protocol (LDP), MPLS Layer 2 virtual private
network (L2VPN), and MPLS OAM globally or on interfaces.
l Configure MPLS traffic engineering (TE), Constraint Shortest Path First (CSPF),
Resource Reservation Setup Protocol with Traffic-engineering Extensions (RSVP-TE),
OSPF-TE, and IS-IS TE capabilities.
l Configure and debug LDPs.
l Configure static unidirectional and bidirectional label switched paths (LSPs).
l View label forward information bases (FIBs).
l Count LSPs.
l Configure tunnels.
Configuring basic tunnel capabilities, tunnel attributes, tunnel applications, and tunnel
protection.
l Configure MPLS OAM detection and MPLS OAM protection groups.

ACL Management
An ACL defines a set of rules that determine what packets are permitted to pass through NEs.

You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:


l Configure a time range in which ACL rules take effect. Absolute time range and periodic
time range are available.
l Configure an ACL group to define the type, matching order, and step of ACL rules. One
ACL group can contain one or multiple ACL rules.
l Configure ACL rules, namely, basic rules, advanced rules, interface rules, Ethernet frame
header rules, Layer 2 rules, and simple rules.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

BRAS Management
A broadband remote access server (BRAS) provides the remote access service for broadband
users.
The U2000 LCT supports the following BRAS features of multi-service control gateways:
l Address pool management
l Authorization, authentication and accounting (AAA) management
l Domain and Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) management
l Built-in Web server management
l Layer 3 Internet service provider (ISP) management
l Portal server management
l VLAN management
l User management
l IPv6 address pool management
l Carrier Grade NAT (CGN) management
The U2000 LCT also supports real-time performance statistics on domains, address segments,
and IP addresses.

BFD Management
BFD is used to check the connectivity of a physical link, logical link, or tunnel between two
systems.
The U2000 LCT supports the following functions:
l Global BFD attribute and time to live (TTL) configuration
l Session management
l BFD alarm management
l BFD for virtual routing and forwarding (VRF), pseudo wire (PW), MPLS TE, virtual
switch instance (VSI), IS-IS, OSPF, BGP, LDP LSP, and physical links

VRRP/VGMP Management
As a fault-tolerant protocol, Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) is used to combine
a group of routers on a LAN into a virtual router and switch services to another router if the
next-hop router fails. This protocol ensures communication continuity and reliability. Major
VRRP management functions provided by the U2000 LCT are global VRRP configuration,
virtual router (VR) configuration, and VRRP Group Management Protocol (VGMP)
configuration. With these functions, routers on a LAN can securely access external networks.
You can perform the following operations on the U2000 LCT:
l Configure global VRRP attributes, interface attributes, and interface VRs; manage
VRRP alarms.
l Configure global VGMP attributes; manage VGMP members and VGMP alarms.

VPN Management
In NE VPN management, provider edge (PE) devices can be configured in per-site mode to
establish services that do not have basic service information such as service names and

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

associated customers. Data configured for NE VPN management and IP end-to-end services
can be shared in the U2000 LCT database. That is, VPN management data configured in the
NE Explorer can be used by IP end-to-end services.
VPN management supports functions such as tunnel policy management, PW template
management, CCC management, PW management, SPW management, MAC address
binding, VSI management, VRF management, and VPN group management.

Multicast Management
The multicast technology implements highly-efficient P2MP data transmission on an IP
network. In multicast mode, a data flow is simultaneously sent to a group of users along the
multicast distribution tree. Only one copy of the multicast data flow is available on every link.
Compared with the unicast mode, the multicast mode reduces the server and CPU load, and
the growth of users does not greatly increase the network load. The U2000 LCT supports the
following multicast management functions:
l Layer 2 multicast management
The U2000 LCT supports VSI-based Layer 2 multicast features of routers, including
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping, source-specific multicast (SSM)
mapping, multicast call admission control (CAC), and multicast group configuration.
l Layer 3 multicast management
The U2000 LCT supports IGMP, Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM), Multicast
Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP), and Layer 3 VPN rendezvous point RP (L3VPN)
configuration and management.

NTP Management
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used for clock synchronization between network
elements (NEs). NTP is of low costs in configuration and applicable to scenarios where the
clock precision is not highly required (ms-level). The U2000 LCT supports the following
NTP management functions:
l Manages NE NTP clocks in client mode and queries the NTP clock status on different
NEs in batches.
l Modifies or re-sets NTP clock configurations in batches.

2.3 System Architecture


The U2000 LCT provides the standard client/server architecture.

2.3.1 Software Structure


The U2000 LCT adopts an open software architecture and a modular structure.
Figure 2-20 shows the architecture of the main modules. Table 2-12 briefly describes the
name and function of each main module.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Figure 2-20 U2000 LCT software structure

LCT Client

Sysmonitor Client Fault

Configuration
Performance

Security

MDP Common
Server
Sysmonitor Server

NEMgr Servers Database

LCT Server

Qx

Transport Network

Table 2-12 Software modules and functions


Module Function

U2000 LCT Client A Java-based graphical application that can run on


Client different platforms. Through the client, the user can
interact with the U2000 LCT system to perform
relevant U2000 LCT functions.

U2000 LCT MDP The message distribution process. Distributes all


Server messages between the U2000 LCT server processes,
as well as between the U2000 LCT server and client.

NEMgr Servers The NE management server that manages NEs.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 2 Product Description

Module Function

Common Servers The common server that provides common services


to non-specific product scope. The common server
programs include fault, performance, security,
topology, scheduled task, and so on.

System Sysmonitor Server Manages and monitors all U2000 LCT server
Monitor processes except MDP.

Sysmonitor Client A simple GUI monitoring terminal based on Java.

The Database refers to the database management software adopted for the U2000 LCT.
The U2000 LCT manages transport network equipment through the Qx interface. For the
details about external interfaces, refer to 2.3.2 External Interfaces.

2.3.2 External Interfaces


This section describes interfaces for the communication between the U2000 LCT and external
systems.
Figure 2-21 shows the communication interfaces between the U2000 LCT and the external
system.

Figure 2-21 External communication interfaces of the U2000 LCT


U2000 LCT

Qx

Qx
The Qx interface uses the internal OptiX private management protocol of Huawei. It enables
the U2000 LCT to connect the OptiX series equipment.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

3 Getting Started

About This Chapter

The following topics introduce some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth,
trouble-free launch of the U2000 LCT.

3.1 Security Precautions (Common Operation)


To ensure that the U2000 LCT will run properly, strictly follow the precautions provided. Any
breaches of the precautions may bring risks to services and even cause no response from NEs.
3.2 Starting or Shutting Down the U2000 LCT
The U2000 LCT uses the standard client/server architecture and single user mode. So, you are
recommended to start or shut down the U2000 LCT by strictly observing the following
procedure.
3.3 Setting the Character Set of an NE
To meet global requirements, the U2000 LCT provides the function of setting or modifying
NE character sets to prevent garbled characters caused by language change.
3.4 Main Windows and Common Operations of the U2000 LCT
This topic describes the main windows of the U2000 LCT client. Learning about the main
windows helps you locate entrances to operations quickly, which increase your operation
efficiency.
3.5 How to Obtain Version Information About the U2000 LCT
This topic describes how to obtain version information about the U2000 LCT.
3.6 Customizing the Client GUI Effect
You can customize the GUI effect of the U2000 LCT client as required.
3.7 Setting the Alert upon Network Disconnections
After you set the disconnection alert on the U2000 LCT client, the sound box connected to the
client plays the sound if the U2000 LCT client is disconnected from the server.
3.8 Locking the Client
You can lock the U2000 LCT client to prevent unauthorized operations.
3.9 Unlocking the Client

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

After a client is locked by the current login user or by the system automatically, the current
user can unlock it, or ask a user in the SMManagers group to reset the password and then log
in again, or ask a user in the Administrators group to unlock the client.
3.10 GUI Input and Display Conventions
The topic describes the input conventions for the text boxes and display conventions for GUI
elements on the U2000 LCT. These rules specify the typing requirements for the text boxes in
the U2000 LCT operation interface. These text boxes are used to enter character strings, file
names, IP addresses, MAC addresses, numerals, passwords, dates, time, and so on.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

3.1 Security Precautions (Common Operation)


To ensure that the U2000 LCT will run properly, strictly follow the precautions provided. Any
breaches of the precautions may bring risks to services and even cause no response from NEs.
l Do not modify the system time when the U2000 LCT is running. Set the time before
installing the U2000 LCT.
To modify the system time of the server, exit the U2000 LCT server and restart it
after the modification.
To modify the system time of the client, exit the U2000 LCT client and restart it
after the modification.
l Avoid modifying the name and IP address of the U2000 LCT server computer. During
installation, you need to change the IP address to 127.0.0.1. Otherwise, the U2000 LCT
fails to be started if you modify the system IP address of the server after installation. You
can change the IP address as follows: Select the server and click Modify Server. In the
dialog box that is displayed, change the IP address to 127.0.0.1.
l On Windows, you must log in to the U2000 LCT server as the user you have chosen
during U2000 LCT installation. Do not change the user name of Windows.
l The data created on the NE is consistent with that on the U2000 LCT. After an NE is
configured and runs properly, ensure data consistency between the NE and the U2000
LCT by means of manual or automatic synchronization.
l Synchronize the NE configuration data to the NMS and query the latest NE data before
setting the parameters.
l When a potentially service-affecting operation is performed, the U2000 LCT asks the
user for confirmation. For example, the U2000 LCT displays a message indicating that
services will be interrupted when you download the U2000 LCT data to the NE.
l The installation directory of the U2000 LCT must contain only letters, digits and
underscores. Otherwise, the U2000 LCT Online Help cannot be used.
l If you select a non-English language for an NE when maintaining it, garbled characters
are returned after you query information about the NE.
l Ensure that no other data communication or transmission process is running on the OS of
the U2000 LCT server.
l The default passwords for the default U2000 LCT client user, server OS user, and
database user are all Changeme_123. To ensure the security of the U2000 LCT, change
the default passwords after the first login and change the non-default passwords
regularly. Meanwhile, the passwords must be complex enough. For example, a password
must contain six or more characters of different types. The allowed character types are
digits, letters, and special characters.
l If the U2000 LCT installed computer has two network adapters, disable one of the
adapters. Otherwise, after NEs are added to the U2000 LCT, their data may fail to be
synchronized or uploaded.

3.2 Starting or Shutting Down the U2000 LCT


The U2000 LCT uses the standard client/server architecture and single user mode. So, you are
recommended to start or shut down the U2000 LCT by strictly observing the following
procedure.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Context
l You are recommended to start the computer and the U2000 LCT application in the
following sequence: Start the computer, start the U2000 LCT server, and then start the
U2000 LCT client.
l You are recommended to shut down the U2000 LCT application and the computer in the
following sequence: Exit the U2000 LCT client, stop the U2000 LCT server, and then
shut down the computer.

3.2.1 Deploying the U2000 LCT


This topic describes how to deploy the U2000 LCT. When it is installed, the processes and
services required by all managed NEs are deployed by default. If the U2000 LCT no longer
manages a certain type of NE, undeploy the related processes and services to improve system
efficiency.

Context
l If U2000 LCT need to manage IP domain device(router/switch), please do not use
U2000 LCT deploy tool.
l When you use the U2000 LCT deploy tool to redeploy processes and services, the
U2000 LCT should be shut down firstly.

Table 3-1 Manageable NE

Option Equipment Type

Manage USP-based OSN, SDH OptiX 155S


PTN, MSTP, WDM and
OTN NEs OptiX 155C

OptiX 155/622 (Metro


2050), OptiX 2500, OptiX
155/622B, OptiX 2500REG

OptiX 155/622H, OptiX


155/622H(Metro 1000),
OptiX 155A

OptiX 2500+, OptiX 2500+


(Metro 3000)

OptiX 10G
MADM(Metro5000)

Metro OptiX Metro 100

OptiX Metro 200

OptiX Metro 500

OptiX Metro 1000V3

OptiX Metro 1050

OptiX Metro 1100

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Option Equipment Type

OptiX Metro 3100

OSN OptiX OSN 9560

OptiX OSN 9500

OptiX OSN 7500

OptiX OSN 7500 II

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 3580

OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 1500

OptiX OSN 2000

OptiX OSN 550

OptiX OSN 500

OptiX OSN 580

OptiX OSN 2500REG

OptiX OSN 50

OptiX OSN 80

WDM OptiX BWS 320G


(OAS/OCI/OIS)

OptiX BWS 320GV3

OptiX BWS 1600G

OptiX BWS 1600G OLA

OptiX BWS 1600S

OptiX BWS 1600S T16

OptiX OTU40000

OptiX Metro 6020

OptiX Metro 6040

OptiX Metro 6040V2

OptiX Metro 6100

OptiX Metro 6100V1

OptiX Metro 6100V1E

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Option Equipment Type

Optix OSN 900A

OTN OptiX OSN 1800 I/II

OptiX OSN 1800 II(Packet)

OptiX OSN 1800 V

OptiX OSN 1832 X8

OptiX OSN 1832 X16

OptiX OSN 3800

OptiX OSN 6800

OptiX OSN 8800 T16

OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 1832

OptiX OSN 8800

OptiX OSN 9600

OptiX OSN 9600 U32(USP)

OptiX OSN 9600 U64(USP)

OptiX OSN 9800

OptiX OSN 9800 U32(USP)

OptiX OSN 9800 U64(USP)

PTN Optix PTN 1900

Optix PTN 3900

OptiX PTN 3900-8

Optix PTN 910

Optix PTN 912

OptiX PTN 950

OptiX PTN 905

OptiX PTN 910-F

OptiX PTN 960

OptiX PTN 906A

OptiX PTN 906AI

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Option Equipment Type

OptiX PTN 905A

OptiX PTN 905B

Manage USP-based marine Marine SLM 1630


NEs
PFE 1670

Manage VRP-based 7900 PTN OptiX PTN 7900-32


NEs
OptiX PTN 7900-24

OptiX PTN 7900-12

OptiX PTN 990

Manage VRP-based 9800 OTN OptiX OSN 9600 U16(VRP)


and 9600 NEs
OptiX OSN 9600 U32(VRP)

OptiX OSN 9600 U64(VRP)

OptiX OSN 9800 U16(VRP)

OptiX OSN 9800 U32(VRP)

OptiX OSN 9800 U64(VRP)

Table 3-2 Process List


Option Process Name

Base process default started Eml_PubSvr

Eml_PerfSvr

Eml_CacheSvr

mc

dam

InventoryDM

UniteUitlDM

NmslogzipDm

uflight_dispatcher

SystemService

FaultService

SecurityService

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Option Process Name

DesktopService0101

EAMService

TopoService

LicenseService

LogService

Select "Manage USP-based OSN, PTN, nemgr_trans


MSTP, WDM and OTN NEs"
nemgr_webtrans

Select "Manage USP-based marine NEs" nemgr_marine

nemgr_webtrans

Select "Manage VRP-based 7900 NEs" nemgr_v8ptn

TrapReceiver0101

trapdispatcher

minasshd

Select "Manage VRP-based 9800 and 9600 nemgr_v8trans


NEs"
nesvc_v8trans

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as an administrator.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Step 2 Run the U2000 LCT package decompression directory\data\TransLCT\client\client\tools


\lightweight\configproc.bat script to start the U2000 LCT deploy tool.

Step 3 Click Stop U2000LCT to stop the U2000 LCT server.

Step 4 Select the managed NE types.

Step 5 Click Optimize. In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

Step 6 Click Start U2000LCT to restart the U2000 LCT server.

----End

3.2.2 Starting the U2000 LCT Server


This topic describes how to start the U2000 LCT server.

Prerequisites
The database is started and works properly.

Context
The U2000 LCT server runs as server processes. You can maintain the U2000 LCT server by
using the System Monitor client.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as an administrator.

Step 2 Check the shortcut icons.

The following shortcut icons are displayed on the desktop:

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

l U2000 Client
l U2000 Server
l U2000 System Monitor
l U2000 NMS Maintenance Suite
l NE Software Management

Step 3 Run the U2000 LCT extraction directory\data\TransLCT\server\platform\bin


\startnms.bat file to start the U2000 LCT server.

Step 4 Choose Start > Programs > Network Management System > U2000 System Monitor or
double-click U2000 System Monitor shortcut icon on the desktop to start the System
Monitor.

Step 5 In the Login dialog box, enter the user name and password to log in to the System Monitor
window. The user name is admin and the default password is Changeme_123. You are
required to change the password at your first login.

Step 6 Check whether U2000 LCT processes are started successfully (manually start processes that
adopt the manual startup mode). The U2000 LCT server is started successfully if all processes
are started successfully.

----End

3.2.3 Starting the U2000 LCT Client


This topic describes how to start the U2000 LCT client.

Context
After the system is installed, user admin is the default user. User admin is a superuser. It has
all operation and management rights.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Programs > Network Management System > U2000 Client or double-click
U2000 Client shortcut icon on the desktop.

Step 2 In the Login dialog box, enter the user name and password to log in to the System Monitor
client. The user name is admin and the default password is Changeme_123 by default. You
are required to change the default password at your first login.
NOTE

If the password has been changed when you start the System Monitor client, use the changed password
for the login.

Step 3 Click Login to enter the NE information list.

----End

3.2.4 Exiting a U2000 LCT Client


Introduction how to exit the U2000 LCT client.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Prerequisites
The U2000 LCT client must be started normally.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the main menu.

Step 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.

----End

3.2.5 Shutting Down the U2000 LCT Server


When the U2000 LCT server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation.
In special circumstances, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer
where the U2000 LCT resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System
Monitor Client to shut down the U2000 LCT server.

Prerequisites
All the U2000 LCT clients connected to the server must be shut down.

Procedure
Step 1 From the main menu of System Monitor Client, choose Administration > Stop All NMS
Process to close all processes of the U2000 LCT server.

Step 2 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. Wait until the U2000 LCT processes are all in
Stopped status. Now the server is shut down successfully.
Now you cannot shut down the MDP process or initialize the database.

----End

3.3 Setting the Character Set of an NE


To meet global requirements, the U2000 LCT provides the function of setting or modifying
NE character sets to prevent garbled characters caused by language change.

3.3.1 Character Set


This topic describes the character sets on the U2000 LCT and the precautions for setting
character sets.

If the character set that an NE transfers to the U2000 LCT is different from the character set
of the internal data (NE source file) on the U2000 LCT, the data transferred to the U2000
LCT is displayed as garbled characters. The data that the U2000 LCT applies to the NE is also
displayed as garbled characters, resulting in failure in reading the NE.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Introduction of Character Set on the U2000 LCT


Character Set Description

GBK Chinese character set which indicates that


the NEs support only Chinese characters.

ISO-8859-1 Latin character set which indicates that the


NEs support only western-Europe
characters.

UTF-8 Unicode encoding mode which indicates


that the NEs support Chinese, English,
Spanish, Russian, German, Portuguese,
Italian, French, and Arabic characters.

Description of Character Sets on the U2000 LCT


l Modifying character sets is not allowed. Character sets are set only when garbled
characters are displayed. The setting rules are as follows:
U2000 LCT Language Character Set

Chinese GBK

English ISO-8859-1

Spanish UTF-8
Russian
German
Portuguese
Italian
French
Arabic

l If the character sets on an NE are changed, the U2000 LCT refreshes the character sets in
real time so that the character sets on the U2000 LCT are the same as those of the NE. At
the same time, the U2000 LCT notifies the user that the NE character sets are changed
by means of an event.
l In the case of a new NE, if the data on the U2000 LCT is displayed as garbled characters
or the language changes, you can query and modify the character set attribute of a single
NE or NEs in batches in the NE Character Set Management window.
l In the case of an old NE, the character set cannot be modified because an old NE does
not have the character set attribute interface. In the NE Character Set Management
window, if the queried NE is an old NE, the related record is dimmed.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

NOTE

l Modifying character sets is not a commonly performed operation. Generally, it is not allowed to
modify character sets. If you change the character set incorrectly, characters may be garbled. If you
change the character set to UTF-8, characters on the NE may be truncated.
l If there is a definite multi-language requirement and the character set needs to be changed to UTF-8,
convert the original character sets according to the guide for related NEs to ensure that the original
data is normally displayed.

Relationship Between Characters and Bytes


Generally, in user manuals, the description of the restrictions on entering characters in text
boxes is specific to English characters. For the restrictions on other languages, see the
following table and calculate the occupied bytes of each language.

Language Bytes occupied by a character

Chinese 3

English 1

Spanish 3

Russian 3

German 3

Portuguese 3

Italian 3

French 3

Arabic 2

List of New NEs


The NEs supporting the preceding nine languages are globalized NEs. The NEs that are
globalized are new NEs, whereas the NEs that are not planned with globalization are old NEs.
The following table lists the NEs that are globalized.

Field NE

Transport OSN 9800 U32/U64 V100R001 and later versions,


OSN 8800 T16/T32/T64 V100R005 and later versions,
OSN 6800/3800 V100R005 and later versions, OSN
1800 V100R002 and later versions, OSN1600S
V100R004 and later versions,
OSN7500/3500/2500/1500 V100R010 and later
versions, Metro1000 V300R007 and later versions,
OSN500 V100R003 and later versions

PTN Frame-shape (PTN3900/1900) V100R200C02 and later


versions, box-shape (PTN950/910/912) V100R200C01
and later versions

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

3.3.2 Setting or Modifying Character Sets


If the character set that an NE transfers to the U2000 LCT is different from the character set
of the internal data (NE source file) on the U2000 LCT, the data transferred to the U2000
LCT is displayed as garbled characters. The data that the U2000 LCT applies to the NE is also
displayed as garbled characters, resulting in failure in reading the NE. The U2000 LCT
provides the function of querying or modifying character sets of NEs to help users manage the
NE data.

Context

NOTICE
Setting the character set incorrectly may result in garbled characters and cause service
exceptions on NEs. Changing the character set to UTF-8 from another one may truncate
characters on NEs. Exercise caution.

l If multiple languages are required when an NE is created, set the character set to UTF-8
to support multiple language entering.
l If multiple languages are required when an NE is upgraded, set the character set of the
NE to UTF-8 to support multiple language entering.
l If garbled characters are displayed after an NE is upgraded and the character set is set on
the NE, you can restore the setting to the original character set.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Charset Management from the
main menu (traditional style); alternatively, double-click Fix-Network NE Configuration in
Application Center and choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Charset
Management from the main menu (application style).

Step 2 In the NE Character Set Management window, select one or more NEs in the left pane and
click .

Step 3 Click Close in the Result dialog box.

Step 4 Click the Query button in the lower right corner.

Step 5 Click Close in the Result dialog box.

Step 6 Select one or more NEs to be modified, right-click in the Character Set column and then
choose the desired character set from the shortcut menu.
NOTE

You can hold down Shift or Ctrl to select multiple NEs, and set or modify character sets in batches.

Step 7 After setting or modifying the character set, click Apply.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Step 8 Click OK when the Warning dialog box is displayed, indicating that modifying the character
set incorrectly may result in garbled characters and cause service exceptions on NEs and that
changing the character set to UTF-8 from another one may truncate characters on NEs.

Step 9 A dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

----End

3.4 Main Windows and Common Operations of the U2000


LCT
This topic describes the main windows of the U2000 LCT client. Learning about the main
windows helps you locate entrances to operations quickly, which increase your operation
efficiency.

3.4.1 Client GUI


This topic describes the components of the client GUI.

Figure 3-1 shows the client GUI.

Figure 3-1 Client GUI

1
2
6

1: Menu bar 2: Toolbar 3: Functional pane

4: Output pane 5: Status bar 6: Window bar

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Menu Bar
The menu bar provides the entries to all the functions of the U2000 LCT client. It consists of
the following menus: File, Fault, Performance, Configuration, Inventory, Administration,
Window, and Help.

NOTE
The menu items and submenu items displayed on U2000 LCT clients vary according to the components
deployed on the U2000 LCT server or the existing license control items.

Toolbar
The toolbar provides the shortcut icons for major operation tasks. For details, see 3.4.4
Frequently Used Shortcut Icon.

Output Pane
The output pane displays the returned information and other relevant information.

Status Bar
The status bar displays information such as the system status, the login users, and the IP
address of the connected server. The information displayed from left to right is as follows:
l Server and communication mode: Displays the name and IP address used for logging in
to the server and the communication mode between the client and server.
l Login user: Displays the name of the login user.
l Connection duration: Displays the client time in real time.
l System pop-up pane: Display a message in real time when the operation on the client is
affected.
l Login mode: Displays the login mode.
l Connection status: Displays the status of the connection between the client and the
server.
l Logo: Displays the logo of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd..

3.4.2 Key GUI Components


This topic describes some common components displayed on the U2000 LCT GUI.

Component Example

Button

Shortcut icon

Option button

Check box

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Component Example

Tab

Text box

Spin box

Group box

Drop-down list

Menu

Shortcut menu

Navigation tree

Dialog box

3.4.3 Frequently Used Buttons


This topic describes the frequently used buttons. The frequently used buttons on the U2000
LCT GUI are as follows:

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Button Function

Selects the objects.

Selects the objects in a batch.

Expands all available options.

Collapses all available options.

Displays or hides a dialog box.

Increases the priority of the selected object.

Decreases the priority of the selected object.

Displays a dialog box.

Queries results from the NE.

Enables the current settings.

Displays the latest result(s).

Exports the selected scheduled tasks to the


browser of the operating system for
printing.

Saves selected data to the specified file.

Enables the current setting and closes the


dialog box.

Cancels the current setting and closes the


dialog box.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Button Function

Closes the operation wizard.

Views the selected data.

Deletes the selected data or icon.

Creates a new service, protection or


/ physical inventory information etc.

Adds existing data or objects.

Proceeds to the next step.

Returns to the previous step.

Closes the dialog box.

Expands the Object Tree.

Collapses the Object Tree.

Enables the current setting and closes the


dialog box.

Cancels the current setting and closes the


dialog box.

Search the related information.

Sets the related condition.

Sets filter criteria and views the filter result.

3.4.4 Frequently Used Shortcut Icon


This topic describes the frequently used shortcut icons on the U2000 LCT client.
You can customize the toolbar so that only the frequently-used buttons are displayed on the
toolbar. To customize the toolbar, right-click the toolbar and choose a menu item from the
shortcut menu.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Button Name Description

Browse WDM Accesses the Browse WDM


Performance Performance window.

Browse SDH Accesses the Browse SDH


Performance Performance window.

Exit Exits from the client.

Log Out Logs out the current user.

Lock Terminal Locks the current client.

Full Screen Display the NMS interface in full


screen mode.

NMS User Manages the user information on the .


Management

Browse Current Displays the Current Alarms


Alarm window.

Browse Alarm Displays the Filter dialog box. After


Logs the filter criteria is set, displays the
Browse Alarm Logs window.

Stop the Current Clicks this shortcut to stop the current


Alarm Sound alarm sound at the side. The alarm
sound starts again when the new
alarm happens. To permanently stop
the alarm sound, you can choose
Fault > Stop the Alarm Sound
Permanently from the main menu.

IPA Management Displays the presence of the IPA that


is in the disabled state. This icon
blinks if the disabled IPA exists.
When you click this icon, the IPA
Management window is displayed.

NM Tasks Displays the process of NMS Tasks


Management management. When you click this
Progress icon, the Configuration Data
Management Progress window is
displayed.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Button Name Description

Networkwide Performs centralized monitoring over


Maintenance Status the maintenance and operation status
of the equipment managed by the ,
including:
l Loopback Status
l Laser Status
l Path Loading
l Alarm Suppression
l Alarm Loading
l Alarm Reversion
l Optical (Electrical) Interface
Loopback
l DCC Enabling Status

Show alarm board Displays the Alarm Board dialog


box. By default, the statistics of all
the current alarms are displayed.

Critical Alarm Dynamically displays critical alarms.


When you click this icon, the
information of all the critical alarms
is displayed.

Major Alarm Dynamically displays major alarms.


When you click this icon, the
information of all the major alarms is
displayed.

Minor Alarm Dynamically displays minor alarms.


When you click this icon, the
information of all the minor alarms is
displayed.

Warning Alarm Dynamically displays warnings.


When you click this icon, the
information of all the warnings is
displayed.

No new events Dynamically displays abnormal


events. This icon indicates that there
are no newly reported events. When
you click this icon, the Query Event
Logs window is displayed.

New events Dynamically displays abnormal


events. This icon indicates that there
are newly reported events. When you
click this icon, the Query Event
Logs window is displayed.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

3.4.5 Keyboard Shortcuts


You can use keyboard shortcuts to perform various operations on U2000 LCT clients. This
function simplifies interactions between users and U2000 LCT clients.

Keyboard Shortcuts of Controls on GUIs


Table 3-3 describes keyboard shortcuts for controls on GUIs. These shortcuts facilitate user
operations performed on the controls.

Table 3-3 Controls and corresponding keyboard shortcuts

Control Description

Menu For a menu whose name is followed by an underscore _, you can press Alt
+_ to choose the menu item.
NOTE
Press F10 to open the first menu on the left.

Drop-down For a drop-down menu whose name is followed by an underscore _, you


menu can press Alt+_ to choose the menu item.

Button l For a button whose name is followed by an underscore _, you can press
Alt+_ instead of clicking the button.
l When the focus is on a button, you can press Enter or the space bar
instead of clicking the button.
l The button that is focused on after you open a dialog box is the default
button. When the focus is not on the button, you can press Enter that
has the same function as the default button.
l You can press Esc to cancel an operation performed in a dialog box and
close the dialog box. In this case, the Esc has the same functions as the
Cancel button in the dialog box.

Drop-down When the focus is on a drop-down list, you can press the DOWN ARROW
list key or the space bar to expand the drop-down list. You can press the UP
ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to switch between the options in a drop-
down list, and press Enter or the space bar to select the current option.

Option If the focus is on an option button, you can press the space bar or the arrow
button keys to select the option button.

Check box If the focus is on a check box, you can press the space bar to select or clear
the check box.

Spin box When the focus is on a spin box, you can enter a number, or press the UP
ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to change it.

Navigation When the focus is on the navigation tree, you can press the UP ARROW or
tree DOWN ARROW key to switch between the nodes in the tree. Press the
RIGHT ARROW key to expand a node, and press the LEFT ARROW key
to collapse a node that contains subnodes.

Tab page When the focus is on a tab page, you can press the LEFT ARROW or
RIGHT ARROW key to switch between tab pages.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Control Description

Main When the focus is on a main window, you can press Ctrl+Tab or Ctrl
window +Shift+Tab or Ctrl+F6 or Ctrl+Shift+F6 to switch between main
windows.

Toolbar In the main window, you can press Ctrl+Shift+T to obtain the focus of the
toolbar. After the focus is obtained, you can press Tab to switch the focus
to the next shortcut icon in the toolbar or press Shift+Tab to switch the
focus to the previous shortcut icon.

Switching When there are multiple controls in a window, dialog box, or tab page, you
between can press Tab to switch from one control to another, and press Shift+Tab to
controls switch to the previous control.
NOTE
When the focus is on a text box and Tab is used to enter tab characters, you can press
Ctrl+Tab to switch to the next control or Ctrl+Shift+Tab to switch to the previous
control.

Text box l When a text cursor appears in the text box and the text box is editable,
you can edit the text.
l When no text cursor appears and the text box is editable, you can press
F2 to switch to the edit mode. Press F2 again or Esc to exit the edit
mode.

Main Press Alt+Space bar to open a menu.


window l Maximize a window: Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to
select Maximize, and press Enter.
l Minimize a window: Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to
select Minimize, and press Enter.
l Adjust the window size: Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW
key to select Size, and press Enter. Press arrow keys to adjust window
size, and press Enter to save the change and exit. Press Esc to exit
without saving changes.
l Restore window size and position: Press the UP ARROW or DOWN
ARROW key to select Restore, and press Enter.
l Move a window: Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to
select Move, and press Enter. Press arrow keys to move a window, and
press Enter to save the change and exit. Press Esc to exit without saving
changes.
l Close the main window: Press Alt+F4, or press the UP ARROW or
DOWN ARROW key to select Close, and press Enter.

Table l When the focus is on a table heading or a cell, press arrow keys to
switch between table headings or cells.
l When the focus is on a table heading, press Space bar or Enter to sort
table items.

l When the focus is on a table heading with filter criteria, press or


Shift+F10 to open the menu. Then, press UP ARROW or DOWN
ARROW key to select filter criteria, and press the space bar or Enter to
filter table contents.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Control Description

Hyperlink When the cursor is on a pane containing a hyperlink, press Enter to open
the hyperlink.

Common Shortcut Keys


Table 3-4 describes other key combinations provided by the U2000 LCT client. You can use
these key combinations to perform operations quickly.

Table 3-4 Common shortcut keys


Shortcut key Function

Right-clicks.
(Application
key) or Shift
+F10

Enter Confirms a message.

Esc Exits the current page/window.

Ctrl+Alt+U Unlocks a terminal.

F1 Opens the Online Help.

F2 Edits the contents of a cell.

Alt+F4 Exits the system.

Ctrl+F Opens the Find window.

Ctrl+X Cuts the selected content.

Ctrl+C Copies the selected content.

Ctrl+V Pastes content.

Ctrl+S Saves changes.

F11 Displays the window in full screen mode.

Alt+C Exits full screen mode.

Ctrl+A Selects all.

Ctrl+F1 Gets help tips.

Ctrl+F4 Closes the current window.

Ctrl+F5 Restores down (when the service window in the public window is
maximized).

Ctrl+F9 Minimizes the window (applied to the service window in the public
window).

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Shortcut key Function

Ctrl+F10 Maximizes the window (when the service window in the public
window is restored).

Ctrl++ Zooms in the topology view.

Ctrl+- Zooms out the topology view.

Tab Moves the focus to the element on the right.

Shift+Tab Moves the focus to the element on the left.

Ctrl+Tab Switchs between service windows.


Ctrl+F6

Ctrl+Shift+T Moves the focus to the toolbar.

Alt+Space bar Opens the menu in the current window.

Win+B Moves the focus to the system tray.

Alt+Shift+F10 Opens the popup menu of a shortcut icon on the workbench.

Ctrl+Shift+Alt Opens the Log Settings dialog box.


+L

Ctrl+Shift+Enter Opens the front view of the device.

Ctrl+Enter Opens the rear view of the device.

NOTE

The common area is under the toolbar on the U2000 LCT client interface.

Shortcut Keys for Clients in the Application Style


The following table describes shortcut keys specific to clients in the application style. These
shortcut keys enable you to perform these operations faster using the mouse on GUI controls.

Table 3-5 Shortcut keys for clients in the application style


Shortcut keys Function

Shift+Space bar

Functions the same as .

+
Functions the same as when the menu item or function that is
focused on can be added to My Favorites.

Delete Delete a function from the My Favorites tab when the focus is on the
function.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

3.4.6 Main Windows


This topic describes the main windows of the U2000 LCT client.

3.4.6.1 NE Information Management


The NE Information Management has the main menu, the toolbar and the NE Information
List.

GUI
See Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 NE Information Management


1 2 3 4 5 6

12 11 10 9 8 7

1: Menu bar 2: Shortcut icon 3: NE Information List


You can operate the Click the button, you can On the NE Information List,
NM and the NE with perform a simple task quickly. displays the managed
submenu bar, include For example: exit NM, lock equipment. You can see the
configure tasks, terminal, log out, NMS user information of NE.
manage tasks and so management, stop the current
on. alarm sound, 3.4.6.5 Browse
Alarm, 3.4.6.7 Browse
Performance Window.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

4: IPA Management 5: NMS Tasks Management 6: Alarm button bar


Progress
Click the button, you The Alarm buttons for alarms
can create IPA Click the button, you can see the at different severity levels are in
protection groups, and progress of configuring the data different colors, refer to 3.6.10.1
specify the parameters management. Setting Colors. The button
for boards in an IPA displays the number of the
protection group. If the data of an NE is being alarms generated on the current
uploaded to the U2000 LCT, the U2000 LCT. You can click the
button displays the progress of button to view current alarms.
data uploading. For example: Browsing Current
Alarms, show alarm panel.
When the U2000 LCT has
abnormal events, the Abnormal
event indicator turns to red
from green. You can click the
indicator to view current
abnormal events.

7: Displays the login 8: Shortcut button 9: Total elapsed time after the
mode. current user is logged in to the
Select an NE, click the button, U2000 LCT.
you can perform a simple task
quickly. For example: refresh the
NE Information List, Creating
NEs, 3.4.6.2 NE Explorer,
3.4.6.5 Browse Alarm, and auto
discovery the NE.

10: Displays user 11: Displays the IP address of 12: NMS status bar
name of the logged-in the current U2000 LCT server.
U2000 LCT user Displays the running information
currently. of the NMS. For example, NMS
login, and loading of each
module.

3.4.6.2 NE Explorer
The NE Explorer is the main user interface used to manage equipment. In the NE Explorer, a
user can configure, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis. The
NE Explorer is the main user interface for commissioning and configuration on a per-NE
basis. The NE Explorer contains a Function Tree that makes the operations easy. To display
the configuration window for an object, select the object and choose a desired function in the
Function Tree.
NOTE

You can open a maximum of ten NE Explorer windows at the same time.

GUI
In the NE information list, right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

The NE Explorer window of an NE is shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 The NE Explorer window of an NE

Related Operation

l Click in NE Explorer window to display the 3.4.6.4 NE Panel.

l Click in NE Explorer window to switch to other NEs.

3.4.6.3 VRP8 NE Explorer


In this user interface, you can manage NE features.

Navigation Path
Right-click the NE in the Main Topology and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.
The VRP8 NE Explorer window of an NE is shown in Figure 1.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Figure 3-4 VRP8 NE Explorer

Button Description

Table 3-6 Button description-configuration list area


Button Description

Query Queries all records.

Create Creates a record.

Delete Deletes the selected record.

Apply Applies modified configurations to an NE.

Save As Saves all the records meeting the set filter criteria as a .xls file.

Filter Sets the filter criteria to query records.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Shortcut Menu Description

Table 3-7 Shortcut menu description-NE tree


Option Description

Locks the selected NE.


Lock
After an NE is locked, only the current user and client can
configure the NE. Other users and clients can only query the NE.

Unlocks the selected NE.


Unlock
After an NE is unlocked, all users and clients can configure and
query the NE.

Table 3-8 Shortcut menu description-configuration list area


Option Description

Create Creates a record.

Apply Applies modified configurations to an NE.

Delete Deletes the selected record.

Synchronize Synchronizes the data of the selected records from the NE.
Selected Record

Customize Column Customizes the attributes to be displayed in the configuration


area.

Save As Saves all records that meet the current filter criteria as a file
in .xls format.

Alarm Suppression Disables an NE or a board from reporting alarms and clears


reported alarms.

Query Relevant Views tunnel information in the tunnel management window of


Tunnels the E2E module. If the desired tunnel does not exist in the E2E
module, a message is displayed indicating that the tunnel cannot
be associated.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Option Description

Query Relevant VPN Jump to the Manage PWE3 Service or Manage VPLS Service
Service window in the E2E module to view the service. If the service
does not exist on the E2E module, a message will be displayed
indicating that the U2000 fails to associate with PWE3 services.
NOTE
l In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Ethernet Service
Management > E-Line Service from the navigation tree. Right-click
in the configuration area and choose Query Relevant VPN Service
from the shortcut menu to access the Manage PWE3 Service
window.
l In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Ethernet Service
Management > E-LAN Service from the navigation tree. Right-
click in the configuration area and choose Query Relevant VPN
Service from the shortcut menu to access the Manage VPLS Service
window.

NOTE

The shortcut menu items for different nodes vary. The configuration list contains only common shortcut
menu items.

3.4.6.4 NE Panel
The NE Panel displays boards and ports in different colors indicating their current status. On
the U2000 LCT, most operations such as equipment configuration, monitoring, and
maintenance are performed in the NE Panel window.

Navigation Path
In the NE information list, right-click an NE and choose Open Slot Diagram from the
shortcut menu.

GUI Description
l Click on the toolbar to view the legends of the boards and ports on the right of the
Slot Layout.
l Right-click the NE Panel window and choose Always On Top, the NE Panel window to
always remain on top.
l When a board occupies multiple slots, the slot ID of the main slot is displayed in
boldface, and the slot ID of the slave slot is dimmed.
l In the NE panel, when you click the processing board equipped with an interface board,
the slot ID of this interface board is orange.
l When you move the cursor to the installed board, the board remarks is displayed. For the
WDM series, WDM (NA) series NEs, if you configure the wavelength informations on
the installed board, when you move the cursor to the board, the optical ports, band type,
and wavelength is displayed.
l To perform an operation related to an installed board, right-click the installed board and
choose the corresponding submenu item from the shortcut menu. For example, you can

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

add a remark of the board in the Modify Remark dialog box by right-clicking the
installed board and choosing Remark.

3.4.6.5 Browse Alarm


This topic describes the user interface for viewing the current and historical alarms and Alarm
Logs. In this user interface, buttons are provided, such as Filter, Synchronize, Refresh, and
Acknowledge, to help you quickly locate the alarm cause.

Context
l Current alarm displays the merged alarms. The rules for merging alarms are as follows:
The alarms with the same IDs, location information, sources, and reasons and in the
Normal maintenance state are merged into one current alarm record.
The alarms with the same IDs, location information, sources, and reasons are the
same but not in the Normal maintenance state are merged into one current alarm
record.
l For a newly reported alarm, if the current alarm contains the record that meets the alarm
merging rule, the alarm is merged into the previous record in the current alarm regardless
of the acknowledgment and clearance status of the record. After being merged, the
frequency of the record is added by 1. The displayed acknowledgment and clearance
status of the record depends on that of the latest alarm. After thecurrent alarm is changed
to a historical alarm, the frequency recorded for the current alarm is reduced by 1.
l You can query details of each alarm log in the Browse Alarm Logs window.
l Alarm log records all the alarms received by the U2000 LCT. In the alarm log, each
alarm is displayed as a record.
l Alarms are not displayed in the current alarm list after they are acknowledged and
cleared and their life cycles end. However, you can query these alarms in the alarm logs
and historical alarms. For details about how to set the lifecyle of an alarm, see Setting the
Lifecycle of the Current Alarm.

Navigation Path
l Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the main menu (traditional style);
alternatively, double-click Fault Management in Application Center and choose
Browse Alarm > Browse Current Alarm from the main menu (application style).
l Choose Fault > Browse Historical Alarm from the main menu (traditional style);
alternatively, double-click Fault Management in Application Center and choose
Browse Alarm > Query Historical Alarm from the main menu (application style).
l Choose Fault > Browse Alarm Logs from the main menu (traditional style);
alternatively, double-click Fault Management in Application Center and choose
Browse Alarm > Query Alarm Logs from the main menu (application style).
Figure 3-5 shows the alarm window.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Figure 3-5 Browsing alarms

3.4.6.6 Browse Event


In the Browse Event Logs window, you can view events at different levels. This window
provides buttons, such as Filter by Template, Filter and Refresh, to help you quickly locate
the alarm cause.

GUI
Choose Fault > Browse Event Logs from the main menu (traditional style); alternatively,
double-click Fault Management in Application Center and choose Browse Alarm > Query
Event Logs from the main menu (application style).

Figure 3-6 shows the window of Event.

Figure 3-6 Browse Event Logs

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

3.4.6.7 Browse Performance Window


You can view the current and history performance data, UAT events and performance
threshold crossings.

GUI
Choose Performance > Browse SDH Performance from the main menu (traditional style);
alternatively, double-click Fix-Network Performance in Application Center and choose
Browse Performance Data > Browse SDH Performance from the main menu (application
style).
Choose Performance > Browse WDM Performance from the main menu (traditional style);
alternatively, double-click Fix-Network Performance in Application Center and choose
Browse Performance Data > Browse WDM Performance from the main menu (application
style).
Choose Performance > Browse NA WDM Performance from the main menu (traditional
style); alternatively, double-click Fix-Network Performance in Application Center and
choose Browse Performance Data > Browse NA WDM Performance from the main menu
(application style).
Figure 3-7 shows the window of SDH performance.
Figure 3-8 shows the window of WDM performance.
Figure 3-9 shows the window of WDM (NA) performance.

Figure 3-7 Browse SDH Performance

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Figure 3-8 Browse WDM Performance

Figure 3-9 Browse WDM (NA) Performance

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

3.4.7 Operations Frequently-Performed on the User Interface


This topic describes the operations that are frequently performed on the U2000 LCT user
interface.

3.4.7.1 Customizing Parameter Display


The U2000 LCT provides the function of customizing the layout of tables. Users can
customize the sequence and width of columns, and whether to display or hide a column in the
table. When a user reopens some windows, the table layout, including the column sequence
and width, is the same as that specified by the user.

Procedure
l Right-click on the top of a parameter list, and choose the desired items from the shortcut
menu. The unselected items are not shown in the parameter list.

l Choose Column Settings from the shortcut menu. The Column Settings dialog box is
displayed. You can set whether to show a column in the parameter list, set the sequence
of columns and the column width.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

----End

3.4.7.2 Copying Table Texts Quickly


The U2000 LCT allows you to copy and paste table text. You can copy text from a table to
other programs quickly.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the text in a table, and press Ctrl+C.
NOTE

l Select all texts in the table by pressing Ctrl+A. Only the current screen of the table is supported.
l To view all data in the current table, click Print or Save As.

Step 2 Switch to another program, and press Ctrl+V. The selected text is copied to the system
clipboard.

----End

3.4.7.3 Monitoring Alarms


You can learn about the number of alarms of specified severities on NEs using the alarm panel
on the U2000 LCT client. In addition, you can learn about the current alarm by using the
alarm panel or alarm indicator. In Alarm Panel, you can double-click an alarm template to
open the window for browsing alarms.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Display Alarm Panel from the main menu (traditional style); alternatively,
double-click Fault Management in Application Center and choose Browse Alarms >

Display Alarm Panel from the main menu (application style) or click the icon on the
toolbar to open the alarm panel.
The U2000 LCT displays the Alarm Panel window, as shown in Figure 3-10. You can add a
current alarm template to the alarm panel if you want to monitor the alarms of specified
severities on NEs. For details, see Setting the Alarm Panel. The alarm panel then displays
alarm information based on the preset template.

Figure 3-10 Alarm panel

NOTE

l The bar charts in the Query Alarm Bar Chart window correspond to the template displayed on the
alarm panel. When you add or delete an alarm bar chart (alarm template) in the Query Alarm Bar
Chart window, the corresponding alarm template is automatically added to or deleted from the
alarm panel. Similarly, when you perform the add or delete operation on the alarm panel, the bar
chart in the Query Alarm Bar Chart window is modified accordingly.
l If a user changes the name, status, or search criteria of a template in the alarm panel on client B, the
changes can be synchronized to client A only after the user restarts client A.

Step 2 Double-click a specific current alarm template on the alarm panel.


The U2000 LCT displays the Browse Current Alarm window. In the Browse Current
Alarm window, you can query the alarm occurrence time, alarm source, and alarm logs. In
addition, you can acknowledge and clear alarms. For details, see Browsing Current Alarms.
NOTE
You can click an alarm indicator to view an alarm of a corresponding severity. For details about the
alarm indicators, see Introduction to the Alarm Panel.

----End

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

3.5 How to Obtain Version Information About the U2000


LCT
This topic describes how to obtain version information about the U2000 LCT.

Procedure
l View the U2000 LCT SPC version on the System Monitor.
a. Log in to the U2000 LCT System Monitor.
b. Click the Component Information tab to view the component version information
about the U2000 LCT.
l View the U2000 LCT SPC version on the U2000 LCT client.
a. Log in to the U2000 LCT client.
b. Choose Help > About from the Main Menu.
c. Click the About or Component tab to view the component version information
about the U2000 LCT.

----End

3.6 Customizing the Client GUI Effect


You can customize the GUI effect of the U2000 LCT client as required.

Context
The ranges of client GUI effect are for Current User and for Client. On the setting page, the
effect range is displayed on the topics of all items.The two types of ranges are described as
follows:
l for Current User: The current user can view the GUI effect after logging in to the
configured server from any client.
l for Client: All users can view the GUI effect after logging in to any server from the
current client.

3.6.1 Setting the Client Skin


The U2000 LCT client provides the gray and green skin colors. You can set the skin color as
required.

Context
l After setting the skin color, you must re-log in to the U2000 LCT client for the settings
to take effect.
l The settings take effect for the current user that logs in different clients, but is invalid for
other users.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.
Step 2 In the Preferences window, choose Skin in the navigation tree on the left.

Step 3 In Skin settings, select a skin color for the client.


Step 4 Click OK.

----End

3.6.2 Setting the Main Window Title


This topic describes how to set the main window title displayed in the title bar.

Context
The settings take effect immediately. They are valid on your other logged-in clients after you
log in again. The settings are invalid for other users.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.
Step 2 From the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, select Main Window Title.
Step 3 In Main Window Title, enter the title you want to display.
Step 4 Click OK.

----End

Result
The title that you set is displayed as the main window title.

3.6.3 Setting the Font Size


You can set the font size on the U2000 LCT client.

Context
l After setting the font size, you must re-log in to the U2000 LCT client for the settings to
take effect.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

l The settings take effect for the current user that logs in different clients, but is invalid for
other users.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.

Step 2 From the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, select Font.

Step 3 Select an option in Font size.


NOTE
Font size can be as follows:
l Small: The font size is 11 points.
l Medium (Default): The font size is 12 points.
l Large: The font size is 13 points.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

3.6.4 Setting the Output Information


The output window is at the bottom of the U2000 LCT client. It displays the prompt messages
and feedback information of the events that affect the running of the U2000 LCT.

Context
The settings take effect immediately. They are valid on your other logged-in clients after you
log in again. The settings are invalid for other users.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.

Step 2 From the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, select Output Window.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Step 3 Set relevant parameters in the Output Window area.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
You can perform the following operations in the information output area at the bottom of the
interface.
Operations Description

Copy 1. Choose the displayed output information.


2. Right-click and choose Copy to copy the information to the clipboard.

Select All 1. Right-click in the output window and choose Select All.
2. Right-click again and choose Copy to copy all the displayed output
information to the clipboard.

Clear Right-click in the output window and choose Clear to clear all the
displayed output information.

Find 1. Right-click in the output window and choose Find.


2. In the Find dialog box, type the key words to be searched for in Find
what.
NOTE
l Match case: To set whether the search content is case sensitive. The default is
case insensitive.
l Match whole word only: To perform a fuzzy search, clear Match whole word
only. To perform a precise search, select Match whole word only.
l Direction: To set the direction for a key word search.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Operations Description

Save As Right-click in the output window and choose Save As. In the Save dialog
box, save the current output to a .txt file.
NOTE
Code formats ISO-8859-1 and UTF-8 are supported. The default encoding format is
ISO-8859-1. You are advised to use the default encoding format if the saved file does
not need to support multiple languages; otherwise, UTF-8 is recommended.

AutoScroll Right-click in the output window and choose AutoScroll. The output
information scrolls automatically to the latest information. Right-click in
the output window again and choose AutoScroll, the auto scroll is
disabled.

Parameter Right-click in the output window and choose Parameter Settings. The
Settings Output Window pane is displayed in the Preferences window.

3.6.5 Setting the Menu Collapse


This function allows you to display the frequently used menu items and hide the seldom used
menu items. This helps you quickly find the menu to perform common operations.

Context
The settings take effect immediately. They are valid on your other logged-in clients after you
log in again. The settings are invalid for other users.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Preferences window, choose Menu Settings in the navigation tree on the left.

Step 3 Select Enable folding menus to enable the menu folding feature.
NOTE

By default, menu folding is enabled after the U2000 LCT client is installed.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Step 4 Set the parameters for menu folding.

Table 3-9 Parameters for menu folding


Parameter Description Setting

Default number of Default number of visible menu Value range: 1-50


visible menu items items in each main menu. Default value: 5
Within the configured login times,
if the number of used menu items
exceeds this value, menus are
displayed based on the actual
number.

Hide menu items if - Value range: 1-50


they are not used for Default value: 10
X consecutive logins

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

3.6.6 Highlighting Alarms


After you set the alarm highlighting, alarms that are not cleared within a specified period are
highlighted in the query result window so that you can concern the alarms.

Context
l For the alarm that meets the highlighting condition, if the difference between the local
time of the client and the alarm occurrence time reaches the threshold time for
highlighting, the alarm is highlighted.
l The settings take effect immediately. They are valid on your other logged-in clients after
you log in again. The settings are invalid for other users.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, expand the Alarm Local Terminal Settings node and choose
Highlighting in the navigation tree.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

NOTE
For NA NEs, alarms in the U2000 LCT has the following four severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Not
Alarmed.

Step 3 In the Highlighting area, set the time and alarm status for alarms of a certain severity, and
then select Enable.
NOTE

The validity period ranges from 1 to 1000000 minutes.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

3.6.7 Setting the Alarm Font


You can set font, size, style, and color for alarms displayed in the current alarm, alarm logs,
event logs, and other windows to distinguish alarms that are not viewed from alarms that are
already viewed.

Context
The settings take effect immediately. They are valid on your other logged-in clients after you
log in again. The settings are invalid for other users.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, expand the Alarm Local Terminal Settings node and choose
Alarm Fonts from the navigation tree on the left.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Step 3 In the Alarm Fonts area, set fonts, sizes, styles, and colors for alarms that are not read and
that are already read.
Step 4 Click OK.

----End

3.6.8 Setting the Display Properties of New Alarm/Event


You can set the display properties of new alarms or events to view newly reported alarms or
events clearly.

Context
The settings take effect immediately. They are valid on your other logged-in clients after you
log in again. The settings are invalid for other users.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, expand the Alarm Local Terminal Settings node and choose
New Alarm/Event in the navigation tree on the left.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

NOTE
For NA NEs, alarms in the U2000 LCT has the following four severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Not
Alarmed.

Step 3 Select Alarm Severities Shown at Top of Screen and the alarm severity that needs to take
effect.
NOTE
The client window is displayed on the top of the screen only when new alarms meeting the monitoring
template are reported.

Step 4 In the New Alarm/Event group box, click Display at the top or Display at the bottom.
Step 5 In the Alarm Severities Shown in Alarm Lamps group box, select the severity to be
displayed on the alarm indicator.
Step 6 In the Others group box, set the display properties.
NOTE
The display property settings for new alarms take effect only when new alarms meeting the monitoring
template are reported.

Step 7 Click OK.

----End

3.6.9 Setting the Number Format of the Client


You can customize the number display format of the client, such as, the display mode of the
system monitoring data.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Context
l After setting the number format, you must re-log in to the U2000 LCT client for the
settings to take effect.
l After you modify the number settings, the display of the number may be changed. You
can view the display effect in the Positive number text box and Negative number text
box.
l The settings take effect for the current user that logs in different clients, but is invalid for
other users.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, select Number Format from the navigation tree on the left.

Step 3 Set the number display format in the Number Format area.
NOTE

l Digits after decimal point: To set the number of digits after the decimal point. The value ranges
from 0 to 3, and the default value is 2.
l Number separator: To select the separator for the integer part of a number. The value can be empty
or comma (,), and the default value is comma (,).
l 0 before decimal point: whether to add 0 before the decimal point. By default, 0 is added before the
decimal point.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

3.6.10 Setting Colors on the Client


This topic describes how to set the alarm and board colors on the client.

3.6.10.1 Setting Colors


You can set a color for each alarm severity or running state. This helps you browse the alarms
of different severities or running state clearly.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Context
l After setting colors for alarms, the alarm icons in the topology view, the alarm record
you have queried, and the alarm indicator on the alarm panel are displayed in the
specified colors.
l By default, the U2000 LCT provides colors for four types of alarms. critical: ,
major: , minor: , and warning: .
l After setting colors for running states, the running state indicators of NE icons and
legends in the topology view are displayed in the specified colors.
l By default, U2000 LCT provides colors for 10 types of running states. The following
shows fault-related running states: critical fault: ; major fault: ; minor fault:
; warning fault: .
l The settings take effect immediately. They are valid on your other logged-in clients after
you log in again. The settings are invalid for other users.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, choose Color Settings in the navigation tree.

NOTE
For NA NEs, alarms in the U2000 LCT has the following four severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Not
Alarmed.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Step 3 In the Color Settings area, click in each row to select the colors of alarms.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

3.6.10.2 Setting the Alarm Display Mode


You can set the alarm and event background colors in windows, such as the current alarm,
alarm log, and event log windows.

Context
The settings take effect immediately. They are valid on your other logged-in clients after you
log in again. The settings are invalid for other users.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, expand the Alarm Local Terminal Settings node and choose
Alarm Display Mode in the navigation tree on the left.

NOTE
For NA NEs, alarms in the U2000 LCT has the following four severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Not
Alarmed.

Step 3 In the Alarm Display Mode area, select an alarm display mode, and set background colors
for different alarm states.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Table 3-10 Alarm background colors in different display modes

Display Mode Field Alarm Background Color

Icon Severity The background color is determined based on


the state. The severity icon is displayed in the
Severity field, and the color of the severity
icon is determined based on the severity.

All the other fields The background colors of all the other fields
are determined based on the state.

Cell background Severity The background color is determined based on


the severity.

All the other fields The background colors of all the other fields
are determined based on the state.

Row background Severity The background color is determined based on


the severity.

All the other fields The background colors of unacknowledged


and uncleared alarms are determined based on
severity, and users cannot change the color.
Whereas the background colors of the alarms
in other states are determined based on the
state.

NOTE

The first columns of the current alarms, historical alarms, and alarm or event logs query windows are not
affected by the setting of the alarm display mode and are not rendered.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

3.6.10.3 Setting Board Color


On the U2000 LCT, you can customize a board color, which indicates that the board works in
the normal state.

Context
The U2000 LCT provides two colors, which indicate that a board works in the normal state:
gray and green.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > NE Software Management > FTP Settings from the main menu
(traditional style); alternatively, double-click Fix-Network NE Software Management in
Application Center and choose NE Software Management > FTP Settings from the main
menu (application style).

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Step 2 In the Preferences window, choose Board State from the navigation tree.

Step 3 In Normal State, select a skin color for the board.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

3.6.11 Setting the Time and Date Formats of the Client


You can set the time format, time mode, and date format that are displayed on the client.

3.6.11.1 Setting the Time Format of the Client


This topic describes how to set the time format of the client.

Context
l After setting the time format, you must re-log in to the U2000 LCT client for the settings
to take effect.
l Next time when you log in to the client, the U2000 LCT client automatically uses the
settings that you set last time.
l The settings take effect for the current user that logs in different clients, but is invalid for
other users.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.

Step 2 From the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, expand the Region Settings
node and choose Time.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Step 3 In the Time group box, set the time format. The time display effect that you set is displayed in
the Time example.
Step 4 Click OK.

----End

3.6.11.2 Setting the Date Format of the Client


This topic describes how to set the date format of the client.

Context
l After setting the date format, you must re-log in to the U2000 LCT client for the settings
to take effect.
l Next time when you log in to the client, the U2000 LCT client automatically uses the
settings that you used last time.
l The settings take effect for the current user that logs in different clients, but is invalid for
other users.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.

Step 2 In the navigation tree on the left of the Preferences window, expand the Region Settings
node and select Date.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Step 3 In the Date group box, set the date format.


NOTE

l Date separator: symbol to separate the date. There are three symbols for you to select: "/", "-", and
".". The default is "/".
l Date format: display format of the date. It can be set to "yyyy/MM/dd", "MM/dd/yyyy", or
"dd/MM/yyyy". The default is "MM/dd/yyyy".

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

3.6.12 Setting the Toolbar


You can set toolbars and shortcut buttons that are displayed on the toolbar tray and the
positions of the toolbars.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Customize Toolbar from the main menu.

Step 2 In the Customize Toolbar dialog box, select the function module in the Toolbars group box.

Step 3 Click Advanced.


The Customize Toolbar dialog box displays the Toolbar Buttons group box.
NOTE

l Click Advanced again. The Toolbar Buttons group box is hidden.


l The Toolbar Buttons group box consists of two parts: Available Tools and Customized Tools. All
the buttons in Customized Tools are displayed on the toolbar, and the buttons in Available Tools are
not displayed on the toolbar.

Step 4 In the Toolbar Buttons group box, set the buttons you want to display on the toolbar.
l In the Available Tools group box, select one button or hold down Ctrl or Shift to select
multiple buttons you want to display. Click to move the selected buttons to
the Customized Tools group box.
l In the Customized Tools group box, select one or hold down Ctrl or Shift to select
multiple buttons you do not want to display. Click to move the selected
buttons to the Available Tools group box.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

NOTE

You can click Reset or Reset All to restore the selected or all toolbars to their initial state. These
operations help you adjust the display mode of buttons on the toolbar based on the initial state.

Step 5 Click OK.


The selected toolbars are displayed in the toolbar tray based on your settings.
Step 6 Optional: Adjust the positions of the toolbars in the toolbar tray.
1. Right-click in the blank area and choose Lock Toolbar from the shortcut menu. If Lock
Toolbar is not selected, you can skip this step.
2. Drag the toolbars to change their positions.
3. After that, right-click in the blank area and choose Lock Toolbar from the shortcut
menu. The toolbars are locked, which prevent the toolbars from being moved by mistake.
NOTE

Right-click in the blank area and choose Reset Toolbar from the shortcut menu. The toolbars are
restored to their initial states.

----End

3.7 Setting the Alert upon Network Disconnections


After you set the disconnection alert on the U2000 LCT client, the sound box connected to the
client plays the sound if the U2000 LCT client is disconnected from the server.

Context
l The audio files used for prompting network disconnections support only the audio files
of the WAV type in the PCM format. The audio files of the WAV type can be recorded in
two formats: PCM and Microsoft ADPCM.
l The settings apply only to the current user on the current client.
l Some computers in sleep mode may close network connections automatically. When this
occurs, the U2000 LCT plays the sound. You can change the sleep mode to solve this
problem.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Preferences from the main menu.
Step 2 In the Preferences dialog box, choose Disconnection Alert from the navigation tree on the
left.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Step 3 In the Disconnection Alert area, select Sound an alert when the client is disconnected
from the server.

Step 4 Click . In the Open dialog box, select an audio file and click Open.

Step 5 Click to play the sound.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

3.8 Locking the Client


You can lock the U2000 LCT client to prevent unauthorized operations.

Prerequisites
The U2000 LCT client is not locked.

Context
In the Preferences dialog box, select Show main window when terminal locked in the Lock
Settings area. Thus, after the client is locked, the main window of the client is visible.

Procedure
l The following table describes how to set the client to be locked manually or
automatically.

Lock Mode Operations

Automatically After you set the client to be locked automatically, the client is
automatically locked if it does not receive any operation
instructions in the specified period.

Manually To ensure U2000 LCT system security, if you do not perform


operations on the U2000 LCT client for a period, you can lock
the client to prevent others from performing illegal operations on
the U2000 LCT client. You can lock the client manually by using
the following method:
l Choose File > Lock Terminal from the menu bar.

l Click on the toolbar.

----End

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

3.9 Unlocking the Client


After a client is locked by the current login user or by the system automatically, the current
user can unlock it, or ask a user in the SMManagers group to reset the password and then log
in again, or ask a user in the Administrators group to unlock the client.

Prerequisites
The U2000 LCT client is locked.

Procedure
The following table describes how to unlock the client in different scenarios.

Operation Operation Method


Scenarios

If the current user 1. Press Ctrl+Alt+U or click .


konws the password
2. Enter the current user name and password, and click OK.

If the current user l A user in the SMManagers group need to reset the current user
forgets the password password. For details, see Resetting the Password of an NMS
user. Then log in to the client again using the user name and the
new password.
NOTE
A user in the SMManagers group cannot reset the password of the
admin user. If the current user is admin, only a user in the
Administrators group can unlock the client.
l The current user must ask a user in the Administrators group to
unlock the client. After the client is unlocked, the current user is
logged out.
1. Press Ctrl+Alt+U or click .
2. Enter the user name and password of the user in the
Administrators group, and click OK.

NOTE
If the number of password retries reaches the upper limit (3 by default), the user account is locked for a
specified period (30 minutes by default). The U2000 LCT user is automatically unlocked after the auto-
unlocking duration. The U2000 LCT user can also be unlocked by security administrators manually. For
details, see Unlocking Users.

3.10 GUI Input and Display Conventions


The topic describes the input conventions for the text boxes and display conventions for GUI
elements on the U2000 LCT. These rules specify the typing requirements for the text boxes in
the U2000 LCT operation interface. These text boxes are used to enter character strings, file
names, IP addresses, MAC addresses, numerals, passwords, dates, time, and so on.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Types of Character Strings


l Languages used in nine countries, namely, China, America, Italy, Spain, France, UAE,
Germany, Russia, and Portugal.
l Input of various types of characters.
NOTE

l The name of a trail or customer can contain "+" and ":".


l The Tab key input cannot be contained in the above names or the values of overheads J0, J1, and J2.
l These rules are made in order to avoid database operation errors or errors occurred when an HTML
report is generated. The Tab key input cannot be contained in command lines.

NOTICE
When you enter characters in Microsoft Pinyin IME and keep pressing a key, too many
characters will be typed in. This leads to the exit of the U2000 LCT client.

Directory
l When files are transferred between different OSs, both Chinese and English directories
are supported.
l When performance data is dumped at the server end, both Chinese and English
directories are supported. In other cases, only English directories are supported.

File Name
The general rule is file name + extension name. The extension name consists of letters,
numerals or underscores, and should not exceed three characters.

The naming rule is that a file name consists of letters, numerals or underscores. It cannot
exceed eight characters. A file name cannot contain spaces or any of the following characters:
\ " . * ; > [ ] ( ) ! $ { } < >. If you need to separate two characters, you may use "_".

Nine languages are supported, with each language corresponding to a naming rule.

Folder Name Language

zh_CN China

en_US America

it_IT Italy

es_ES Spain

fr_FR France

ar_SA Saudi Arabia

de_DE Germany

ru_RU Russia

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 3 Getting Started

Folder Name Language

pt_PT Portugal

IP Address
The IP address is decimal, for example, 10.10.0.254:9801 (9801 is the port ID, and can be
omitted).

MAC Address
The MAC address is hexadecimal, for example, 00-06-5B-84-50-84.

Types of Numerals
Integer type: In this mode, only integral numbers can be typed in.
Decimal fraction type: In this mode, besides numerals, characters f and e, as well as the
decimal point are allowed.

Password
Each time you enter a character in the password text box, a dot is displayed instead. The
password cannot be copied.

Date and Time


Generally, the date and time can be selected from or typed in the Time/Date Attribute dialog
box.
The default format of time and date is as follows:
l Time: 16:06:06 (Hour:Minute:Second)
l Date: 06-06-2000 (Month-Day-Year)

Table
The parameters on the GUI are presented in tables to display parameter values of different
objects.
l If -- or - is displayed in the table cell of a selected record, it indicated that the parameter
is not supported. This type of table cell in not editable.
l If / or Unknown is displayed in the table cell of a selected record, the parameter is
supported but the parameter value is unavailable for a certain reason at the moment.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 4 FAQs

4 FAQs

About This Chapter

This section provides answers to the most frequent questions.

4.1 No Response When Double-clicking the Installer File or the Installation Progress Is
Always 0%
4.2 U2000 LCT Processes Fail to Start Up

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 4 FAQs

4.1 No Response When Double-clicking the Installer File


or the Installation Progress Is Always 0%
Symptom
No response is provided when a user double-clicks the U2000 LCT installer file or the
installation progress is always 0%.

Possible Causes
l The current language is not English.
l The OS does not support the U2000 LCT version.
l The U2000 has been installed or database data has not been cleared.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the OS language. The U2000 LCT can only be installed on an English OS.
l If the current language does not meet requirements, change the language as follows:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Click Region and Language.
c. Click the Location tab and set Current location to English.
d. Click OK.
l If the current language meets requirements, proceed to the next step.

Step 2 Check whether the OS supports the U2000 LCT version to be installed. Different U2000 LCT
versions have different software and hardware requirements. Specific requirements are
described in 1.1.1 Hardware and Software Requirements.
l If the OS does not meet requirements, install the required OS version.
l If the OS meets requirements, proceed to the next step.

Step 3 Follow 1.2.1 Performing Pre-installation Checks to check for the U2000 and database.
l If the U2000 is present, uninstall it.
l If the database is present, take the measure provided in 1.2.1 Performing Pre-
installation Checks.

Step 4 Reinstall the U2000 LCT.

----End

4.2 U2000 LCT Processes Fail to Start Up


Symptom
U2000 LCT processes fail to start up, and users cannot log in to the System Monitor client.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide 4 FAQs

Possible Causes
Desktop service 0101 is not running.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following command to start desktop service 0101:
cd $U2000LCT_DIR\server\bin svc_adm -cmd startsvc DesktopService0101

Step 2 Restart U2000 LCT processes.

----End

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide A Service Ports Description

A Service Ports Description

This appendix describes service ports of the U2000 LCT, related precautions, and how to
query the service ports.

A.1 Background
This section describes the service ports used by management systems.
A.2 Notes and Precautions
In the practical communication process, the source (the server) and the sink (the client) use
relevant ports. Usually you only need to specify the source port, and the sink port is
dynamically created.
A.3 Service Ports to Be Filtered
This section describes the service ports to be filtered.
A.4 Ports Between the U2000 LCT Server and the NEs
This section describes the ports used between the U2000 LCT server and the NEs.
A.5 Ports Between the U2000 LCT Server and the Clients
This section describes the ports used between the U2000 LCT server and the clients.
A.6 How to Query Service Ports
This section describes how to query the service ports.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide A Service Ports Description

A.1 Background
This section describes the service ports used by management systems.

To ensure the network security, you can take measures on the customer's network. The
following are the two cases that affect the network security:

l Security filtering settings such as routers or firewalls are configured in the network
environment where the NMS runs. When carrying out the project, avoid the service ports
used by the NMS being filtered by those security filtering settings.
l Some service ports providing system services are closed to prevent network or virus
attacks. Note that the service ports used by the NMS should not be closed, and otherwise
the NMS will not run properly.

A.2 Notes and Precautions


In the practical communication process, the source (the server) and the sink (the client) use
relevant ports. Usually you only need to specify the source port, and the sink port is
dynamically created.

Note the following during the project implementation:

l The service ports used by the NMS should not be closed.


l If there are routers or firewalls between the source and the sink, then check all ports used
by the source and the sink to make sure that they can be opened, and the source can
communicate with the sink.

A.3 Service Ports to Be Filtered


This section describes the service ports to be filtered.

In the security policy of the firewall, you must filter the traffic according to the IP address and
the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number.

The TCP/UDP port number is used to split a datagram, and transfer the datagram to the
proper applications.

The TCP/UDP port range is 0~65535, which is divided into three segments:

l 0~1023: Identifies some standard services, such as FTP, Telnet, and Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFTP).
l 1024~49151: Assigned by Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) to the registered
applications.
l 49152~65535: Private port numbers, which are dynamically assigned to any
applications.

A.4 Ports Between the U2000 LCT Server and the NEs
This section describes the ports used between the U2000 LCT server and the NEs.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide A Service Ports Description

While setting up a firewall between the U2000 LCT server and the NEs, you must enable
ports as follows:
l Any port on the U2000 LCT server can connect to the ports listed in Table A-1.
l Any port on the NEs can connect to the ports listed inTable A-2

Table A-1 Ports on the NEs for connecting the U2000 LCT
Source IP Destinatio Protocol Source Port Destinatio Remarks
Address n IP n Port
Address

U2000 LCT Any SNMP UDP Any port 161 The U2000
server device LCT server
sends
commands
to Port 161
of the
SNMP
device.

U2000 LCT Any SNMP TCP Any port 22 The U2000


server device 23 LCT server
sends a
Telnet
request to
Port 23 of
the SNMP
device.

U2000 LCT Any SNMP TCP Any port 1400 Listens the
server device access of
U2000 LCT
or command
lines.

U2000 LCT Any SNMP UDP Any port 1500 The port is
server device used for
automatic
device
discovery. It
listens the
automatic
device
discovery of
the U2000
LCT.

U2000 LCT Any SNMP TCP Any port 5432 Channel for
server device Command
Line (SSL)

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide A Service Ports Description

Table A-2 Ports on the U2000 LCT server for connecting NEs
Source IP Destinatio Protocol Source Port Destinatio Remarks
Address n IP n Port
Address

Any SNMP U2000 LCT UDP Any port 162 The SNMP
device server device
reports Traps
to Port 162
on the
U2000 LCT
server.

Any SNMP U2000 LCT UDP Any port 514 This port is
device server used for
Syslog
Service.

Any SQL U2000 LCT TCP Any port 1433 This is a


client server (SQL default port.
server) You can
specify it as
required.

Any SNMP U2000 LCT UDP Any port 1500 The port is
device server used for
automatic
device
discovery. It
listens the
automatic
device
discovery of
the U2000
LCT.

Any FTP U2000 LCT TCP Any port 20 The FTP


client server (FTP control port.
server)

Any FTP U2000 LCT TCP Any port 21 The FTP


client server (FTP control port.
server)

Any TFTP U2000 LCT UDP Any port 69 The TFTP


client server port. It
(TFTP features poor
server) security, and
is not
recommende
d.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide A Service Ports Description

Source IP Destinatio Protocol Source Port Destinatio Remarks


Address n IP n Port
Address

Any TFTP U2000 LCT UDP Any port 8999 Toolkit


client DC server Client talk to
Toolkit
server by
non SSL,
Toolkit is
integrated by
U2000 LCT
server as a
separated
process to
upload
software of
NE and NE
database.

Any TFTP U2000 LCT UDP Any port 9000 Toolkit


client DC server Client talk to
Toolkit
server by
SSL, Toolkit
is integrated
by U2000
LCT server
as a
separated
process to
upload
software of
NE and NE
database.

A.5 Ports Between the U2000 LCT Server and the Clients
This section describes the ports used between the U2000 LCT server and the clients.
While setting up a firewall between the U2000 LCT server and the clients, you must enable
the ports on the U2000 LCT server. Any port on the U2000 LCT server can connect to the
ports listed in Table A-3.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide A Service Ports Description

Table A-3 Ports on the U2000 LCT server for connecting the clients
Source IP Destinatio Proto Source Destin Remarks
Address n IP col Port ation
Address Port

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 123 SNMP trap
server server (NTP
Server)

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 389 The port is used for LDAP
client server authentication.
(LDAP
Agent)

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 514 This port is used for
client server Syslog Service.

U2000 LCT DB Server TCP Any port 1433 This port is used to listen
server to the access of processes
to the database in the
Windows OS.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 5100 This port is used to listen
client server 5200 to the access of processes
to the database in the
UNIX OS.

Any Tomcat TCP Any port 8005 This port is the


8009 management port of the
tomcat process.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 8019 This port is the
client server management port of the
PTN device.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 8015 This port is the
client server management port of the
PTN device.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 8080 The port that provides
client server Web services.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 8090 Service port of Web
client server server, used to process the
HTTP request.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 8250 This port is used to listen
client server to the Web LCT client.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 8251 This port is used for Web
client server LCT monitor (deployed in
sysmonitor) to manage
HTTP request for Web
LCT.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide A Service Ports Description

Source IP Destinatio Proto Source Destin Remarks


Address n IP col Port ation
Address Port

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 8999 Toolkit Client talk to
client server Toolkit server by non
SSL, Toolkit is integrated
by U2000 LCT server as a
separated process to
upload software of NE
and NE database.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 9000 Toolkit Client talk to
client server Toolkit server by SSL,
Toolkit is integrated by
U2000 LCT server as a
separated process to
upload software of NE
and NE database.

CFMS U2000 LCT TCP Any port 8001 Provides the function of
server configuring telephone
numbers for narrowband
subscribers based on the
PCCW protocol.

CLTS U2000 LCT TCP Any port 8888 Provides the line test
server interface based on the
PCCW protocol.

StdClts U2000 LCT TCP Any port 9003 Provides the 112 line test
server interface based on the
China Telecom Standard.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 9800 The communication port
client server 9803 between the U2000 LCT
client and the server.
NOTE
l When the login mode is
Common, port 9800 is
used.
l When the login mode is
Security (SSL), port
9803 is used.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 9808 The iView receives
client server external commands
through this command.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 9810 The port occupied by the
client server U2000 LCT test console
module.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide A Service Ports Description

Source IP Destinatio Proto Source Destin Remarks


Address n IP col Port ation
Address Port

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 9811 The proxy port for the
client server device maintenance client
to telnet or ping a device.
NOTE
The Telnet protocol has
security risks and therefore
joint use with other secure
protocols (such as SSH) is
recommended.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP TCP 11014 Service port of for the
server server access of application
database.

Tomcat U2000 LCT TCP TCP 10443 Service port of Web


client server, used to process the
HTTP request.

WEB LCT NE TCP Any port 11000 The port that the NE
Server management management process
process 11050 opens to the access of the
Web LCT.

WEB LCT NE TCP Any port 11051 The port that the NE
Server management management process
process 11100 opens to the access of the
Web LCT and the port
supports the SSL.

NE WEB LCT TCP Any port 11000 The port that the Web
management Server LCT uses to connect to
process 11050 the NE management
process.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 11000 MSSQL Server
server server
11100

NE WEB LCT TCP Any port 11051 The port that the NE
management Server management process
process 11100 opens to the access of the
Web LCT and the port
supports the SSL.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 9820 Listens the northbound
server server TL1 access of the U2000
LCT.

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 12102 Client auto upgrade
client server

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide A Service Ports Description

Source IP Destinatio Proto Source Destin Remarks


Address n IP col Port ation
Address Port

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 12201 U2000 LCT maintenance
client server 12202 tools
12203
12212

12215

U2000 LCT U2000 LCT TCP Any port 12113 It is a service for play the
client server alarm alert from U2000
LCT client to U2000 LCT
server.

A.6 How to Query Service Ports


This section describes how to query the service ports.

Procedure
l Run the following command to view the Windows system service ports:
netstat -ab

----End

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

B Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
AIS alarm indication signal
Alarm severity According to ITU-T recommendations, the
alarm is classified into four severities:
Critical, Major, Minor, Warning.
Alarm A visible or an audible indication to notify
the person concerned that a failure or an
emergency has occurred. See also Event.
ARP Address Resolution Protocol
Attribute Property of an object.
B
Binding In virtual concatenated payload
configuration, designating one binding
number to identify the VC4s of the same
virtual concatenated payload is called
"bind". If a fault occurs to one of the bound
services, all bound services will switch as a
whole.
Bound path The VC Trunk refers to the 2 M paths which
are bound together to transmit Ethernet data.
The VC Trunk is an entity between the
Ethernet port and the 2 M path.
C
CLI command-line interface

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

Configuration data The data that configures the NE hardware


for coordination between this NE and other
NEs in the entire network and operation of
specified services. Configuration data is the
instruction file of NEs, and it is the key for
efficient network running. The typical
configuration data includes board
configuration, clock configuration and
protection relationship.
Configure To set the basic parameters of an operation
object.
Connection point A reference point where the output of a trail
termination source or a connection is bound
to the input of another connection, or where
the output of a connection is bound to the
input of a trail termination sink or another
connection. The connection point is
characterized by the information which
passes across it. A bidirectional connection
point is formed by the association of a
contradirectional pair.
Connection A "transport entity" which consists of an
associated pair of "unidirectional
connections" capable of simultaneously
transferring information in opposite
directions between their respective inputs
and outputs.
Current alarms Alarms that do not clear, or has cleared but
is not acknowledged.
Current performance data The performance data stored in the current
register is called current performance data.
The current 15-minute or 24-hour register
(only one for each) is applied to collect the
performance data in the current monitoring
period. It changed within the monitor
period.
D

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

DCC Within an STM-N signal there are two DCC


channels, one is the 192 kbit/s DCC-R
channel composed of bytes D1-D3, and the
other is the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel
composed of bytes D4-D12. All NEs can
communicate with one another through the
DCC-R. The DCC-M is not the regenerator
section overhead and does not support
communications among regenerators, and it
is used to support communication channels
of more universal purpose. For example, it
supports TMN as a physical channel of
ECC.
DCN data communication network
DST daylight saving time
E
ECC Embedded Control Channel. An ECC
provides a logical operations channel
between SDH NEs, utilizing a data
communications channel (DCC) as its
physical layer.
EMS element management system
F
Failure The fault cause persisted long enough to
consider the ability of an item to perform a
required function to be terminated. The item
may be considered as failed; a fault has now
been detected.
Fault A fault is the inability of a function to
perform a required action. This does not
include an inability due to preventive
maintenance, lack of external resources, or
planned actions.
G
GNE gateway NE
GUI graphical user interface
H
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol
HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
History alarms Alarms that have cleared and been
acknowledged.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

History performance data The performance data stored in the history


register and the auto-report performance
data stored on the U2000 LCT are called
history performance data in a unified way.
I
IP address In the TCP/IP protocol, it is used to
uniquely identify the address of the
communication port, which consists of four
bytes in decimal digits, for example,
10.9.161.55.
J
JRE Java runtime environment
L
LAN local area network
Label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet
for identification.
Layer A concept used to allow the transport
network functionality to be described
hierarchically as successive levels; each
layer being solely concerned with the
generation and transfer of its characteristic
information.
LCT Local Craft Terminal. The LCT provides the
user with single-layer management network
solutions to the transmission network of up
to five NEs to realize integrated
management of multi-service transmission
network. Usually it uses the cross-over cable
or serial port cable to connect one NE, so as
to configure and maintain a single NE. See
also U2000 LCT.
M
MSTP multi-service transmission platform
N
NA North America
NE Explorer NE Explorer is the main operation interface
of the U2000 LCT. For easy navigation, the
NE Explorer window presents an
expandable directory tree (Function Tree) in
the lower left pane. The configuration,
management and maintenance of the
equipment are accessed here.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

NE Panel NE Panel displays subracks, boards, and


ports in different colours depending on their
status. In the U2000 LCT, most equipment
configuration, monitoring, and maintenance
are performed in the NE Panel window.
NE Network Element. NE includes the hardware
unit and the software running on it. Usually,
one NE has at least an SCC (system control
and communication) board which
responsible for the management and
monitoring of the NE. The NE software runs
on the SCC board.
NG WDM next-generation wavelength division
multiplexing
NM Network Management. In the
telecommunication network management
architecture, the U2000 LCT is an element
management system that supports all
functions at the element management layer.
See also U2000 LCT.
NMS network management system
NSAP network service access point
O
OAM operation, administration and maintenance
Online help An indexed collection of information on all
aspects of the U2000 LCT. They can be
accessed at any time from the Help menu or
by pressing the F1 key.
OS operating system
OSI open systems interconnection
OSN optical switch node
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
P
Path A trail in a path layer.
PDH plesiochronous digital hierarchy
Performance register Performance register is the memory space
for performance event counts, including 15-
min current performance register, 24-hour
current performance register, 15-min history
performance register, 24-hour history
performance register, UAT register and
CSES register.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

Performance threshold Performance events usually have upper and


lower thresholds. When the performance
event count value exceeds the upper
threshold, a performance threshold-crossing
event is generated; when the performance
event count value is below the upper
threshold for a period of time, the
performance threshold-crossing event is
ended. In this way, performance jitter caused
by some sudden events can be shielded.
Private line Both communication parties are connected
permanently.
Procedure A generic term for an action.
Process A generic term for a collection of actions.
PTN packet transport network
R
RMON remote monitor
Route The IP route selection is in table driving
mode. In each host and each router of the
Internet, there is a routing table that contains
information about how the service is
transmitted from the source to the sink,
providing a basis for route selection.
Ethernet static routing in ET1 refers to the
mapping relationship between the Ethernet
port and the bound path. Its routing type
includes port routing and VLAN routing.
Port routing: It means configuring a route
between the Ethernet port and the bound
path port, which is usually used for point-to-
point networking communication; VLAN
routing: It means configuring a route
between the Ethernet port and the bound
path port based on the VLAN service. It can
be used flexibly in point-to-point, point-to-
multipoint or multipoint-to-multipoint
communication. The implementation is to
divide and converge the data stream
according to the VLAN flag of the packet.
As a VLAN flag can be added to the
Ethernet port, the equipment can be applied
more flexibly.
RTN radio transmission node
S
SDH synchronous digital hierarchy

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

Settings Parameters of an operation that can be


selected by the user.
Severity See Alarm Severity.
Shortcut menu A menu that is displayed when right-
clicking an object' s name or icon. Also
called a context menu.
Subnet mask Also referred to as the network mask off
code, it is used to define network segments,
so that only the computers in the same
network segment can communicate with one
another, thus suppressing broadcast storm
between different network segments.
Subnet number Subnetwork numder is used to differentiate
the different network sections in the sub-
network conference. Actually it is the first
several digits (one or two) of the user phone
number. An orderwire phone number is
composed of the sub-network number and
the user number.
Subnet Sub-network is the logical entity in the
transmission network and comprises a group
of network management objects. A sub-
network can contain NEs and other sub-
networks. A sub-network planning can
better the organization of a network view.
Support The frame on the bottom of a cabinet, when
installing the cabinet on the antistatic floor.
T
TMN Telecommunications Management Network.
The entity which provides the means used to
transport and process information related to
management functions for the
telecommunications network.
U
UNEQ unequipped
URL uniform resource locator
V
VLAN ID Namely, it is the virtual LAN identifier. One
Ethernet port can support 4K VLAN routes,
and one NE can support up to 8K VLAN
routes.
W

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 LCT
U2000 LCT User Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

WDM service The WDM service is accessed at the client


side of the OTU board that can access SAN
services.
U2000 LCT It is an element level management system
for the optical transmission network. It can
manage RTN and NG WDM serial optical
transmission equipment. See also LCT.
WTR time A period of time that must elapse before a -
from a fault recovered - trail/connection can
be used again to transport the normal traffic
signal and/or to select the normal traffic
signal from.
WTR Wait to Restore. This command is issued
when working channels meet the restoral
threshold after an SD or SF condition. It is
used to maintain the state during the WTR
period unless it is pre-empted by a higher
priority bridge request.

Issue 04 (2016-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

S-ar putea să vă placă și